Home

Mercedes-Benz 2003 ML 500 Automobile User Manual

1. ceeeseeeeeseeees 146 Headlamp cleaning system 148 SUN VISOS eiieeii 148 Rear window defroster 149 Climate Control seseessseseesereeereeeesess 150 Setting the temperature Adjusting air distribution and volume DefrOStING its a3 secs cde ciees Air recirculation mode 6 Deactivating the climate control system Air conditioning Ventilated storage compartment Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents ceee Audio Systemsin Audio and telephone operation Operating safety eee ee eeeeeeeeee Operating and display elements Button and soft key operation Operation cccesssccceeessreceeseees Radio operation ccscceeeeeereees Satellite radio SAT USA only Cassette operation cceeeeeees CD changer operation Telephone operation 6 Power WINCOWS seeeseceeeseeeeeeneeeeee Opening and closing the windows Synchronizing power windows Panorama sliding pop up roof 158 159 159 159 160 162 162 165 168 172 175 179 186 186 188 Opening and closing the roller sun blinds for the panorama sliding pop up roof 189 Opening and closing the panorama sliding pop up roof 190 Synchronizing the panorama sliding pop up roof and the roller sunblinds 193 Driving SYSteMS esse eeseeeeeees 194 Cruise
2. For more information on high beam see Off Combination switch gt page 102 Low beam headlamps on Combination switch gt Turn the switch to E Turn signal right For more information on headlamps see Turn signal left Lighting gt page 98 gt Press the combination switch up Q or down 2 The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp Kel or EM in the instrument clus ter flashes High beam High beam flasher Windshield wipers The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column Combination switch Single wipe Switching on windshield wipers gt Make sure the ignition is switched on Switching on windshield wipers gt Turn the combination switch to the de sired position depending on the inten sity of the rain 0O Windshield wipers off I Intermittent wiping Il Normal wiper speed Ill Fast wiper speed Vehicles without rain sensor Fast wiper speed III goes to setting Il when the vehicle is standing still Vehicles with rain sensor Intermittent wiping interval dependent on wetness of windshield Wiping will not occur with a door open Getting started Driving Vehicles with rain sensor Do not leave in intermittent setting when vehi cle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning Wipers will operate in presence of water sprayed on the windshield and wipers may be damaged as a result The switch
3. The Service Booklet describes all the nec essary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals Always have the Service Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your autho rized Mercedes Benz Center for service The service advisor will record each ser vice in the booklet for you Roadside Assistance The Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown Calls to the toll free Roadside Assistance number 1 800 FOR MER Cedes in the USA 1 800 387 0100 in Canada will be answered by Mercedes Benz Cus tomer Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day 365 days a year For additional information refer to the Mercedes Benz Roadside Assistance Pro gram Brochure in your glove box Change of address or ownership If you change your address be sure to send in the Change of Address Notice found in the Service and Warranty Informa tion Booklet or simply call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA at 1 800 FOR MER Cedes or Customer Ser vice in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 It is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise If you sell your Mercedes please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it avail able to the next operator If you bought this vehicle used be sure to send in the Notice of Purchase of Used Car found in the Service and Warranty In formation Bookle
4. Approximately one month before your next service is due one of the following mes sages will appear in the multifunction dis play while you are driving or when you switch on the ignition example service A SERVICE A IN xx DAYS SERVICE A IN xx MILES KM SERVICE A DUE NOW The type of service due is indicated in the multifunction display field Minor service A Major service B SERVICE A IH 300 Miles F 72 F i The interval between services depends on your driving habits A gentle driving style moderate engine speeds and the avoidance of short distance trips will 10 303 lengthen the interval between services Operation Maintenance Clearing the service indicator The service indicator is automatically cleared e after ten seconds when you switch on the ignition or when reaching the service threshold while driving e after 30 seconds once the suggested service term had passed You can also clear it yourself gt Press the reset button on the instru ment cluster gt page 22 Service term exceeded e aO ey If you have exceeded the suggested service term you will see the following message in the multifunction display SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY XX DAYS SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY XX MI KM An acoustic signal will also sound Operation Maintenance The Mercedes Benz Center will reset the service indicator following a completed service Calling up the serv
5. Gear ranges With the gear selector lever in position D you can limit the transmission s gear range by pressing the gear selector lever to the left D and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the gear selector lever to the right D The selected gear range appears in the multifunction display If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rpm limit the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected v gt Effect The transmission shifts through fourth gear only The transmission shifts through third gear only With this selection you can use the braking effect of the engine Controls in detail Automatic transmission Effect The transmission shifts through second gear only Allows the use of engine s braking power when driving e on steep downgrades e in mountainous regions e under extreme operating conditions The transmission operates in first gear only For maximum use of engine s braking effect on very steep or lengthy downgrades Controls in detail Automatic transmission Gear selector lever position Effect Park position Gear selector lever position when the vehicle is parked Place gear selector lever in position P only when vehicle is stopped The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked Rather the driver should always set the parking brake in addition to placing the gear sele
6. Normal heating Rapid heating gt Make sure the ignition is switched on All the lights in the instrument cluster come on Controls in detail Seats Switching on seat heating gt Press upper switch position Q A red indicator lamp on the switch comes on Switching off seat heating gt Press upper switch position Q again e The seat heater will be automatically switched off after approximately 30 minutes Switching on rapid seat heating gt Press lower switch position Both red indicator lamps on the switch come on i The system switches over to normal heating mode after approximately five minutes Only one indicator lamp re mains lit Switching off rapid seat heating gt Press lower switch position again If one or both of the indicator lamps on the seat heater switch are flashing there is insufficient voltage available since too many electrical consumers are turned on The seat heater switches off automatically The seat heater will switch back on again automatically as soon as suffi cient voltage is available YV Memory function Prior to operating the vehicle the driv er should check and adjust the seat height seat position fore and aft and seat backrest angle if necessary to en sure adequate control reach and com fort The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper height See also the section on airbags gt page 57 for proper seat positioni
7. C 230 Kompressor Q Power steering pump Idler pulley Supercharger Automatic belt tensioner Air conditioning compressor Crankshaft Coolant pump Generator alternator P13 22 2071 31 C 320 P13 22 2040 31 Automatic belt tensioner Power steering pump Air conditioning compressor Crankshaft Coolant pump Generator alternator Idler pulley Technical data Layout of poly V belt drive Technical data Engine V Engine Model Engine Mode of operation No of cylinders Bore Stroke Total piston displacement Compression ratio Output acc to SAE J 1349 Maximum torque acc to SAE J 1349 Maximum engine speed Firing order Poly V belt C 230 Kompressor 203 740 271 4 stroke engine gasoline injection 4 3 23 in 82 00 mm 3 35 in 85 00 mm 109 6 cu in 1796 cm 8 5 1 189 hp 5800 rpm 141 kW 5800 rpm 192 lb ft 3500 rpm 260 Nm 3500 rpm 6000 rpm 1 3 4 2 2420 mm C 320 203 764 112 4 stroke engine gasoline injection 6 3 54 in 89 90 mm 3 3 in 84 00 mm 195 2 cu in 3199 cm 10 1 215 hp 5700 rpm 160 kW 5700 rpm 229 lb ft 3000 rpm 310 Nm 3000 rpm 6000 rpm 1 4 3 6 2 5 2380 mm The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle See an authorized Mercedes Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment VY Rims and Tires Use only tires and rims
8. Controls in detail Audio system gt Press either the EN or button The stored entries are selected accord ing to the alphabetical order of the ini tial letter or gt Press either the PSM or EI button The stored entries are selected in increments of four gt Press the desired numerical key A to EA The stored entries are selected accord ing to the alphabetical order of the ini tial letters e g for B Brown press button twice i Several characters and symbols cannot be shown on the display for technical reasons They have been replaced with spaces Controls in detail Audio system Searching and selecting phone book en tries by number PT b F ETRS o 5u ND ABC Cr os CLR or P82 60 4077 31 Press the NUM key The current number is marked in the display Press either the EN or Biv button The stored entries are selected according to numerical order Press either the BS or I button The stored entries are selected in increments of 5 e g Entry M5 Entry M10 etc Starting dialing process gt Once you have selected a number press the SND key Repeat dialing If the number dialed is busy you can again place calls to the last ten telephone num bers dialed using the repeat dialing func tion Manual repeat dialing redial Saal L 1254r r ND CLE END gt P82 60 4079 31 Press the SND key The last number dialed is shown in the
9. For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and re straint systems for infants and chil dren see Children in the vehicle gt page 65 A Always fasten your seat belt before driving off Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women Warning Failure to wear and properly fasten and po sition your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident You and your passengers should always wear seat belts If you are ever in an accident your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled Without your seat belt buckled you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt Airbags can only protect as they are designed if the occupants are prop erly wearing their seat belts Warning VAN Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest reclined Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck That could cause serious or even fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best re straint when the wearer is in an uprig
10. If the inside of the headlamps is fogged up switch the lights on for a sufficient amount of time Bi Xenon headlamps A Warning Do not remove the cover 3 for the Bi Xenon headlamp Because of high voltage in Bi Xenon lamps it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its compo nents We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician P82 10 3285 31 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp Cover for high beam flasher parking and standing lamp Headlamp cover for Bi Xenon head lamp P82 10 3286 31 High beam bulb for high beam flasher Bulb holder Parking and standing lamp High beam bulb for high beam flasher gt Switch off the lights gt Open the hood gt page 236 gt Turn headlamp cover 2 to the left and remove Turn bulb holder with bulb to the left and pull out Pull out bulb from the base do not pull on glass tube Insert new bulb so that the base fits in the bulb holder recess and is level Place the bulb holder with bulb on the lamp mounting and turn bulb holder to the right until it engages Install cover and turn to the right until it engages Front turn signal lamp bulb gt gt gt Switch off the lights Open the hood gt page 236 Turn bulb socket to the left and pull out Push bulb into socket turn to the left and remove Insert new bulb in socket push in and turn to the right Reins
11. Parking lamps Replacing bulbs Switchingon 98 Parking position Exterior rear view mirrors 293 294 296 297 97 132 Parts see Spare parts service 320 PASS AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 67 263 Passenger compartment 230 Fuse boxin 317 Interior lighting 103 Interior rear view mirror 39 Parcel net in front passenger footwell 203 Passenger safety see Occupant safety 56 Pedals 223 Performance In cold weather 335 In hot weather 335 Phone book Loading 136 Quick search 136 Phone number Dialing 136 Redialing 136 Plastic and rubber parts Cleaning 256 Playing CDs 177 Poly V belt drive 344 Layout 323 Positions Memory function Recalling from memory 96 Storing into memory 96 Power assistance 223 Power seat Adjusting backrest tilt 35 Adjusting head restraint height 36 Adjusting seat cushion tilt 35 Adjusting seat height 35 Front seat head restraints 91 Seat fore and aft adjustment 35 Power train 344 Power washer 252 Power window Opening and closing with SmartKey 188 Power windows 186 Side windows 186 Synchronizing 188 Practical hints First aid kit 284 Fuses 317 Lamp in center console 263 Lamps in instrument cluster 258 Messages in the display 264 Spare wheel 285 Spare wheel bolts 287 Symbol messages 268 Text messages 265 Towing the vehicle 313 Vehicle jack 286 Vehicle tool kit 285 Premium unleaded gasoline 333 Problems While driving 50 Program mode selector switch 344 Automati
12. Telephones and two way radios Warning A Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system pos sibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury Radio transmitters such as a portable tele phone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are con nected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle Refer to the radio transmitter operation in structions regarding use of an external antenna Catalytic converter Your Mercedes Benz is equipped with monolithic type catalytic converters an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis sions Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our rec ommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Service Booklet To prevent damage to the catalytic con verters use only premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be repaired promptly Otherwise excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter causing it to overheat and start a fire A As with any vehicle do not idle park or op erate this vehicle in areas where combusti ble materials suc
13. The functions of all the submenus will reset to factory settings i The settings you have changed will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset button a second time Approximately five seconds after pressing the reset button for the sec ond time the SETTINGS menu reap pears in the display For safety reasons the following func tions are not reset while driving e theLIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLIGHT MODE function in the LIGHTING submenu e the SETTINGS KEY DEPENDENT func tion in the CONVENIENCE submenu Controls in detail Control system Submenus in the Settings menu gt Press button RA or EN In the display you see the collection of the submenus Press button EE The selection marker moves to the next submenu Controls in detail Control system The submenus are arranged by hierarchy Scroll down with the J button scroll up with the button Move within the submenus with the Rg or EAN button to the individual functions The settings themselves are made with button or i Resetting the functions of a submenu For each submenu you can reset all the functions to the factory settings gt Move to a function in the submenu gt Press the reset button in the instru ment cluster for approximately three seconds In the display you will see the request to press the reset button again to con firm gt Press the reset button again All functions of the sub
14. e Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever e Select positions 3 2 or 1 only when driving at moderate speeds for hill driving After 1000 miles 1500 km you may grad ually increase vehicle and engine speeds to the permissible maximum All of the above instructions also apply when driving the first 1000 miles 1500 km after the engine or the rear dif ferential has been replaced i Always obey applicable speed limits Y Driving instructions Drive sensibly save fuel Fuel consumption to a great extent de pends on driving habits and operating con ditions To save fuel you should e Keep tires at the recommended infla tion pressures e Remove unnecessary loads e Remove roof rack when not in use e Allow engine to warm up under low load use e Avoid frequent acceleration and decel eration e Have all maintenance work performed by qualified technicians at the intervals specified in the Service Booklet and as required by the FSS Contact your au thorized Mercedes Benz Center Fuel consumption is also increased by driv ing in cold weather in stop and go traffic on short trips and in hilly country Drinking and driving A Drinking and driving and or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combina tions Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes perceptions and judgement Warning The possibil
15. e Immediately after refueling engine is started and operated for at least five minutes These precautions and recommendations are supposed to prevent any difficulties when starting and operating the engine which otherwise may be experienced be fore the engine has fully adapted to the dif ferent fuel If in spite of these recommendations the engine does not perform properly adding more gasoline at least 3 gallons 12 liters to the fuel may improve the en gine behavior Cold weather performance It is possible that starting times will signif icantly increase at temperatures below 32 F 0 C At low temperatures the use of a block heater is recommended see your authorized Mercedes Benz Center for further information Rough idling may also be experienced at such temperatures be fore the engine is fully warmed up E85 fuel is unsuitable for use when am bient temperatures fall below 14 F 10 C Hot weather performance At ambient temperatures above 95 F 35 C start times may increase and be ac companied by a rough idle following the start Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Cruising range E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than gasoline To ensure that engine per formance with Ethanol fuel is similar to that when using gasoline the engine must burn more Ethanol fuel As a result it is to be expected that the fuel consumption will increase when using E85 compared to gas
16. gt Loosen both screws Q and remove lamp gt Replace the tubular lamp and reinstall lamp gt Retighten the screws Practical hints Replacing wiper blades Y Replacing wiper blades gt Pull the tab in the direction of arrow 2 Warning A and remove windshield wiper For safety reasons remove SmartKey from Installing starter switch before replacing a wiper blade otherwise the motor could suddenly gt Slide the wiper blade into the cutout on turn on and cause injury the wiper arm gt Slide the tab back in the direction of Removing arrow until it audibly engages gt Fold the wiper arm back to rest on the gt Fold the wiper arm forward windshield ome P82 30 2165 31 Lock Unlock Never open the hood when the wiper arm is folded forward Hold onto the wiper when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted Make certain that the wiper blades are properly installed Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage For your convenience we recommend that you have this work carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Y Flat tire Preparing the vehicle gt Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving traffic on a hard surface Turn on the hazard warning flashers Engage th
17. H T ing o be certain to avoid a possibility of Warning damage to the transmission however we recommend the drive shaft be dis connected at the rear axle drive flange for any towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage If circumstances require towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground always tow with a tow bar if e the engine will not run e there is a malfunction in the power sup ply or in the vehicle s electrical system as that will be necessary to adequately con trol the towed vehicle Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground make certain that the SmartKey is in starter switch position 2 If the SmartKey is left in starter switch position 0 for an extended period of time it can no longer be turned in the switch In this case the steering is locked To unlock re move SmartKey from starter switch and re insert To signal turns while being towed with the hazard warning flasher in use turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 2 and activate the combina tion switch for the left or right turn sig nal in the usual manner only the selected turn signal will operate Upon canceling the turn signal the hazard warning flasher will operate again Warning A With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer
18. If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds an emergency call is initi ated automatically by the Tele Aid sys tem provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available Arming the alarm system The alarm system is armed after locking the vehicle with the SmartKey The turn signal lamps flash three times to indicate that the alarm system is activated The in dicator lamp in the switch for the tow away alarm will flash after approximately ten seconds when the alarm system is completely armed gt page 80 i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three times one of the following ele ments may not be properly closed e adoor e the trunk lid e the hood Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again Disarming the alarm system The alarm system is disarmed when you unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the alarm system is deactivated i The alarm system will rearm automati cally after approximately 40 seconds if a door or the trunk lid is not opened Canceling the alarm To cancel the alarm gt Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch or gt Press the or button on the SmartKey Tow away alarm Once the tow away alarm is armed a visual and audible alarm will be triggered when someone attempts to raise the vehicle i The tow away protect
19. Selecting temperature display mode gt gt Move the selection marker with the or ESM button to the IN STRUMENT CLUSTER submenu Press button BaN or R repeatedly until you see this message in the dis play TEMP INDICATOR The selection marker is on the current setting TEMP IHDICATOR B E C Ha 4 32 2194 31 Press or E to set temperature unit to degrees Celsius C or degrees Fahrenheit F Controls in detail Control system Selecting speedometer display mode gt Move the selection marker with the or E button to the IN STRUMENT CLUSTER submenu gt Press button EAN or RA repeatedly until you see this message in the dis play DISPLAY VALUES IN The selection marker is on the current setting DISPLAY VALUES IN Km 4 32 2195 31 gt Press or FB to set speedome ter unit to Km or Miles Selecting language gt Move the selection marker with the or ESM button to the IN STRUMENT CLUSTER submenu Press button Jj or R repeatedly until you see this message in the dis play TEXT The selection marker is on the current setting GERMAN EHGLISH FRENCH TALIA SPANISH Press or E to select the lan guage to be used for the multifunction display messages Available languages e German e English e French e Italian e Spanish Selecting display speed display or out side temperature gt Move the selection marker with the or E button t
20. The new speed is set i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate cruise control After brief acceleration e g for passing cruise control will resume the last speed set Setting a lower speed gt Depress the cruise control lever to position 2 and hold it down until the desired speed is reached gt Release the cruise control lever The new speed is set i Vehicles with automatic transmission When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate the transmission will au tomatically downshift if the engine s braking power does not brake the vehi cle sufficiently Fine adjustment in 1 mph Canada 1 km h increments Faster gt Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow Q Slower gt Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow Setting to last stored speed Resume function A The speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions per mit Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to preset speed could cause an accident and or seri ous injury to you and others Warning gt Briefly push the cruise control lever to position The cruise control will resume the last set speed gt Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal V Loading Roof rack PEN L al Mount the roof rack only between the fas tening points and in the recess of the rubber
21. Vehicle tool kit The vehicle tool kit and air pump are stored in the wheel well below the trunk floor Vehicle jack Air pump Alignment bolt Wheel wrench Towing eye bolt Spare wheel bolts Practical hints Where will I find 2 Vehicle jack ve ZRN _ _ _ P40 10 2774 31 P40 10 2773 31 Turn the crank handle clockwise until it gt Remove the vehicle jack from the spare engages operational position Wine eb Welhtnge rine Munk NIN Before storing the vehicle jack in its com gt Push the crank handle up partment e t should be fully collapsed e The handle must be folded in storage position Warning A The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle To help avoid personal injury use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised Be certain that the jack is always vertical plumb line when in use es pecially on hills Always try to use the jack on level surface make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take up bracket Al ways lower the vehicle onto sufficient ca pacity jack stands before
22. gt page 98 gt Push the combination switch in direction The high beam indicator on the instrument cluster is illuminated gt page 22 High beam flasher gt Pull the combination switch briefly in direction 2 Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher can be activat ed with the ignition switched on or off It is activated automatically when an airbag is deployed The switch is located on the center con sole oC eas Hazard warning flasher switch Switching on the hazard warning flasher gt Press the hazard warning flasher switch All turn signals will flash With the hazard warning flasher acti vated and the combination switch set for either left or right turn only the re spective left or right turn signals will operate when the SmartKey in the starter switch is in position 1 or 2 Switching off the hazard warning flasher gt Press hazard warning flasher switch again If the hazard warning flasher was acti vated automatically press switch Q twice Interior lighting Activating automatic control gt Press the rocker switch 8 to center The controls are located in the overhead position control panel Interior lamps are switched on in dark ness when you unlock the vehicle A 5 o The interior lamps are switched off follow ing a preset time gt page 128 open a door remove the SmartKey from starter switch P82 2
23. i You should keep this air vent closed when outside temperatures are low Controls in detail Climate control Opening the air vent gt Raise lever 1 Closing the air vent gt Lower lever Q i The compartment can get very warm due to its confined space When storing heat sensitive objects in the compart ment close the air vent while heating the passenger compartment Do not obstruct the air vent in the stor age compartment 157 Controls in detail Climate control Rear passenger compartment To open center air vents adjustable air vents gt Turn thumbwheel 2 upward i The temperature at the air vents for rear passenger compartment 1 and 8 is the same as at the dashboard center air vents Left center air vent Thumbwheel for air volume control for center air vents Right center air vent V Audio system Audio and telephone operation These instructions are intended to help you become familiar with your Mercedes Benz audio system They con tain useful tips and a detailed description of the user functions Warning VAN In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an accident the driver should enter system settings with the vehicle at a stand still and operate the system only when road and traffic conditions permit Always pay full attention to traffic conditions first before operating system controls while driving Bear in mind that at
24. to 1 gallon 4 liters water For temperatures below freezing point use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze e 1 part S to 100 parts solvent 40 ml S to 1 gallon 4 liters solvent Y Consumer information The following text is published as required of all manufacturers of passenger cars un der Title 49 Code of U S Federal Regula tions Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 Uniform tire quality grading Quality grades can be found where appli cable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Traction Tread wear Temperature 200 AA A All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Tread wear The tread wear grade is a comparative rat ing based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For ex ample a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 11 2 times as well on the gov ernment course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Technical data Consumer information Traction The tra
25. 20 Ibs 9kg on the front passenger seat This could cause the front or side impact airbag on the front passenger side to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system s deployment threshold Side impact airbags window curtain airbags The side impact airbags and window cur tain airbags are deployed e onthe impacted side of the vehicle e in impacts exceeding a preset deploy ment threshold e independently of the front airbags The side impact airbags and window cur tain airbags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the system s deploy ment threshold Safety and Security Occupant safety The front passenger side impact airbag will only deploy if the system senses that the Side impact airbags Seat belts When the engine is started the seat belt non usage warning lamp illuminates to remind you and your passengers to fas ten your seat belts If the driver s seat belt is not fastened before the engine is started the seat belt non usage warning lamp illuminates and a warning chime sounds for approximately six seconds when the engine is started The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in most states and all Canadian provinces Even where this is not the case all vehicle occupants should have their seat belts fas tened whenever the vehicle is in motion For more information on seat belts see Fastening the seat belt gt page 41 i
26. 297 Rear fog lamp bulbs 298 Rear lamp bulbs 294 298 Rear turn signal bulbs 298 Side marker lamp bulbs 298 Standing lamp bulbs 296 297 295 296 Wiper blades 300 Reset button in the instrument cluster 119 Reset knob in the instrument cluster Resetting All functions control system 119 All functions of a submenu 120 Fuel consumption 133 Service indicator FSS 250 Trip odometer 107 Residual heat utilization 344 REST Residual engine heat utilization 344 Restraint system see Infant and child restraint systems Reverse manual transmission Shifting into 138 Rims 325 Roadside assistance Tele Aid 210 Roller sunblind for the sliding pop up roof Closing 189 Opening 189 119 120 65 69 RON 234 RON Research Octane Number 344 Roof rack 197 Rotating wheels 246 Rubber parts Cleaning 256 S Safety Occupant 56 Safety belts see Seat belts 41 Safety systems Driving 73 Saving current speed 195 Searching Radio station 115 Seat belt force limiter 64 Seat belt outlet height adjustment 43 Seat belts 62 Cleaning 255 Fastening 41 Height adjustment 43 Proper use of 43 63 Safety guidelines 60 Warning lamp 262 Seat heater Switching off 94 Switchingon 94 Seats 89 Adjusting 32 Easy entry exit feature 89 Heater 93 Manual 33 Rapid seat heating 94 Split rear bench seat 197 Selecting Display 125 Selector lever 23 Lock 45 Position automatic transmission 23 139 Self test BabySmartTM airbag deactivatio
27. 96 Storing exterior rear view mirror Parking POSITION ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 97 Lighting yesse a 98 Exterior lamp SWItCH essere 98 Combination switch esseeeee 102 Hazard warning flasher 102 Interior lighting eee 103 Instrument cluster eee eeeeeeeeeeseeeee 105 Instrument cluster illumination 105 Coolant temperature display 106 Trip Odometel essceeeereeeeeneees 107 Tachometer esesecesteeeeeees 107 Outside temperature indicator 107 Control system eeeeceesseeeesneeeeesees 109 Multifunction display 109 Multifunction steering wheel 110 MENUS reniir e atesetareoees seve 112 Standard display menu 114 AUDIO MENU ssssessssessseesssessssesssess 114 NAVI M Nu eee eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeee 117 Malfunction memory menu 117 Settings MENU eeeeeeseeeeeneeees 118 Trip Computer MENU ceeeee 132 TEL MENU ticiecterk eects 134 Manual transmission ceeeseeeeee 137 Shifting into reverse eee 138 Automatic transmission 06 139 One touch gearshifting 140 Gear ranges eee eee eeseeeeees 141 Gear selector lever position 142 Program mode selector switch 144 Accelerator position eeeeee 145 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode eeeseeee 145 Good visibility ee eee eeseeeeeeeee eee 146 Rear view MIFTOIS
28. COQ 8 Hands free microphone for 205 Tele Aid emergency call system telephone and voice control system see separate operating instruc tions Interior rear view mirror 39 146 eee ee Garage door opener 214 Left reading lamp on off 104 Tele Aid emergency call 209 system button At a glance Door control panel Y Door control panel Item Door handle Memory function for stor ing seat exterior rear view mirror and steering wheel settings Seat adjustment Switches for opening clos ing front door windows E P a a E f P wee Snes nm Getting started Unlocking Driving Parking and locking Getting started Unlocking Y Unlocking The Getting started section provides an overview of the vehicle s most basic func tions First time Mercedes Benz owners should pay special attention to the infor mation given here Unlocking with the SmartKey If you are already familiar with the basic functions described here the Controls in detail section will provide you with further information The corresponding page refer ences are located at the end of each seg ment P80 35 2108 31 SmartKey with remote control Lock button Unlock button Panic button gt page 72 i Canada only Only vehicles equipped with an anti theft alarm system have SmartKeys with integrated panic bu
29. Engine oilkeenanensianro a 237 Transmission fluid level 241 Coolant level 241 Batte Viie aea aar E 242 Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system 243 Tires and wheels ssceesseeeeeeeeeees 244 Important guidelines 244 Life OF tife sccccscececsssessessocseduesnscaceees 245 Direction of rotation eee 245 Checking tire inflation pressure 245 Rotating wheels eee 246 Winter driving eee eee eeseeeeeeees 247 Winter tires 0 ccccceceesesseceeeesneees 247 Block heater Canada only 248 SNOW chains 0 eee eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeees 248 Maintenance ccceecssccceeeessteeeeeeees 249 Clearing the service indicator 249 Service term exceeded 249 Calling up the service indicator 250 Resetting the service indicator 250 Vehicle care ececeesesteceeeeestteeeeeeeees 251 Cleaning and care of the vehicle 251 Practical hints 00 0 ce eeeeeeeeeee 257 What t0 0 Ici eens s 258 Lamps in instrument cluster 258 Lamp in center console 263 Messages in the display 264 Where will find o n 284 First sald Kiteeseen 284 Spare wheel cccsesecceesssseeeeees 285 Vehicle tool Kit n se 285 Unlocking locking in an emergency 288 Unlocking the vehicle 00 288 Locking the vehicle 289 Changing batteries in the SmartKey cee esesseeeeseeeeee
30. Possible solution Add coolant gt page 241 If you have to add coolant frequently have the cooling system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Warning VAN Driving when your engine is badly over heated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire You could be seriously burned Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until it cools down 272 Possible cause The coolant is too hot During severe operating conditions and stop and go city traffic the coolant tem perature may rise close to 248 F 120 C Possible solution gt gt Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine Only start the engine again after the message disappears You could otherwise damage the engine The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Display symbol Display message COOLANT VISIT WORKSHOP Possible cause The poly V belt could be broken The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunctioning Practical hints What to do if P
31. booklet Vehicle Care Guide Power washer When using a power washer for cleaning the vehicle always observe the manufac turer s operating instructions Never use a round nozzle to pow er wash tires The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire Always replace a damaged tire Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface Do not aim directly at electrical parts electrical connec tors seals or other rubber parts Tar stains Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become more difficult to remove A tar remover is recommended Paintwork painted body components Mercedes Benz approved Paint Care should be applied when water drops on the paint surface do not bead up normally every three to five months depending on climate and washing detergent used Mercedes Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be applied if the paint surface shows signs of embedded dirt i e loss of gloss Do not apply any of these products or wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot Use the appropriate MB Touch Up Stick for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage i e chips from stones vehi cle doors etc Engine cleaning Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to protect electrical compo nents and connectors from the intrusion of water and cleaning agents Corrosion protection such as MB Anticor rosion Wax should be applied to the e
32. display Select the desired telephone number using EN BA ET or Ea button The abbreviation L and the number of the entry are shown in the top line of the display When you have selected a number press the SND key The call will be made Automatic repeat dialing redial If a call cannot be connected press the SND key REDIAL will appear on the display and re peated attempts to place the call will be made for the next four minutes Selecting numbers directly from the directory gt Enter previously selected 3 digit 1 999 number of the entry using number keys EEN to GM Press the RCL key The telephone number stored under that entry will be dialed Press the SND key The call will be made Speed dialing gt Input desired entry number using number keys EEN to HG A maximum of two digits can be en tered If necessary correct the last number entered with the CLR key Press the SND key The telephone number stored under that entry will be dialed The number L and the full entry number will be shown in the display Controls in detail Audio system Quick dialing gt Press one of the desired number buttons J to BQH longer than one second The telephone number saved under that number will be dialed Ea Please be aware that button EEE might already be reserved for an emer gency call number Controls in detail Audio system Emergency call gt Press b
33. driver and front passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear your seat belts For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the backrest Fasten your seat belt and ensure that it is properly positioned on your body Since the airbag inflates with considerable speed and force a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the airbag Oc cupants who are unbelted out of position or too close to the airbag can be seriously in jured by an airbag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye e Sit properly belted in an upright position with your back against the seat back rest gt D gt D Safety and Security Occupant safety e Adjust the driver seat as far as possible rearward still permitting proper opera tion of vehicle controls The distance from the center of the driver s breast bone to the center of the airbag cover on the steering wheel must be at least ten inches 25 cm or more You should be able to accomplish this by a combina tion of adjustments to the seat and steering wheel If you have any prob lems please see your authorized Mercedes Benz Center e Do not lean with your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dash board e Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel rim Placing hands and arms in side the rim can increase the risk and pote
34. gt Adjust head restraint to desired posi tion Rear seat head restraints Head restraint height C Release button Raising gt Manually adjust the height of the head restraint by pulling it upward If the head restraint is fully retracted press release button Q and pull the head restraint out Controls in detail Seats Lowering gt To lower the head restraint press re lease button and press down on the head restraint A For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Warning Adjust head restraint so that the head re straint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an ac cident or similar situation Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intend ed to help reduce injuries during an acci dent Controls in detail Seats Folding head restraints back Mw Warning A The rear seat head restraints can be folded Make sure the head restraints engage when placing them upright Otherwise their protective function cannot be as sured backward for increased visibility A For safety reasons always drive with the rear head restraints in the upright position when the rear seats are occupied Keep the area around head restraints clear of articles e g clothing to not obstruct the f folding operation of the head restrain
35. nels digitally via satellite radio SAT Analog station frequencies Selecting the band You can select from among FM AM or WB frequency bands Weather band gt page 168 i FM frequency band FM 87 7 107 9 MHz AM frequency band MW medium wave 530 1710 KHz Controls in detail Audio system gt Press FM AM or WB key repeatedly un til desired band has been selected The FM AM and WB frequency bands are called up one after the other The frequency band currently selected appears in the upper left hand corner of the display Selecting a station The following options are available for selecting a station e Direct frequency band input gt page 166 e Manual tuning gt page 166 e Automatic seek tuning gt page 166 e Scan tuning gt page 167 e Preset buttons gt page 167 e Automatic station memory Autostore gt page 167 Controls in detail Audio system Direct frequency input Select the desired frequency band FM1 e sasra E AM SAT AUD HS Manual tuning gt Select the desired frequency band Pra es g o Fn AM SAT AUD AS Automatic seek tuning gt Select the desired frequency band FM es AM SAT AUD AS P82 60 4061 31 gt Press EJ button gt Enter desired frequency using buttons EE to EN iJ You can only enter frequencies within the respective waveband If a button is not pressed with
36. s braking power This helps pre vent overheating of the brakes and re duces brake pad wear After hard braking it is advisable to drive on for some time rather than immediately parking so that the air stream will cool down the brakes faster Driving off Apply the brakes to test them briefly after driving off Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic Warm up the engine smoothly Do not place full load on the engine until the oper ating temperature has been reached When starting off on a slippery surface do not allow a wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off Doing so may cause serious damage to the drive train which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Simultaneously depressing the acceler ator pedal and applying the brake re duces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear Operation Driving instructions Parking Set the parking brake whenever park ing or leaving the vehicle In addition move gear selector lever to position P manual transmission first or reverse gear When parking on hills always turn front wheel towards the curb A Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire gt D Warning gt D Operation Driving instructi
37. them possibly causing a blowout gt Detach the electric air pump gt Store the electrical plug and the air hose behind the flap and place the air pump back in the trunk Practical hints Flat tire Lowering the vehicle Warning gt Lower vehicle by turning crank coun E A terclockwise until vehicle is resting ful Have the tightening torque checked after ly on its own weight changing a wheel The wheels could come gt Remove the jack loose if they are not tightened to a torque of 80 Ib ft 110 Nm gt Before storing the jack in the trunk it should be fully collapsed with handle folded in P40 10 2731 31 Wheel bolts gt Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly fol lowing the diagonal sequence illustrated to until all bolts are tight Observe a tightening torque of 80 Ib ft 110 Nm V Battery The battery is located in the engine com partment on the right hand side E Removal of filter box gt Release the three clamps Q gt Remove filter box Installation of filter box gt Insert filter box properly gt Secure it with the three clamps Q Warning VAN Failure to follow these instructions can re sult in severe injury or death Never lean over batteries while connecting you might get injured Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes skin or clothing In case it does immediately flus
38. 243 Halogen type Replacing bulbs 295 Refilling washer fluid 243 Switching off 53 Switching on 48 Washer fluid 338 Washer system 338 Headliner and shelf below rear window Cleaning 255 Heated seats 93 Height adjustment Head restraints 34 36 91 Seat belts 43 Steering wheel 37 High beam flasher 102 High beam headlamps Messages in display 278 Replacing bulbs 293 295 Switching on 102 High beam headlamps xenon type Replacing bulbs 296 High mounted brake lamp 294 Hood 236 Closing 237 Message in display 277 Opening 236 Hydroplaning see Aquaplaning 227 l Identification labels 322 Ignition 31 Switching on 45 Immobilizer 78 Outside temperature indicator 107 J Activating 78 Selecting language 124 Jack 285 286 Deactivating 78 Instruments and controls see Cockpit 20 Jump starting 310 Infant and child restraint systems 65 Interior lighting 103 K Installing 69 Activating automatic control 103 ay dependencuanence LATCH child seat mounts 70 Deactivating automatic control 103 seas gt af y Inflating Delayed shut off 128 nee Key positions in starter switch 31 Spare tire 304 Manual operation 103 Key mechanical 288 289 Information Interior rear view mirror Key SmartKe Button for Tele Aid 211 Adjusting 39 e ro re installing ANETE ts Changing the batteries 290 Infant and child restraint systems 69 Interior storage spaces 200 Checkine the batteries 84 Towing eye bolt 316 Armrest 202 Factor nee 83 Wipe
39. 76 Switching on 77 Synchronizing 266 Warninglamp 261 ETD 342 Safety guidelines 60 ETD Emergency tensioning device 64 Ethanol fuel At the gas station 233 Switching fuels 334 Exterior lamp switch 98 Exterior lamps Delayed shut off 127 Exterior rear view mirror Activating parking position 147 Exterior rear view mirrors Adjusting 40 Parking position for 132 F Fahrenheit Setting temperature units 123 Fastening the seat belts 41 Fine adjustment Cruise control 196 First aid kit 284 Flat tire 301 Inflating the spare tire 304 Lowering the vehicle 306 Mounting the spare wheel 301 Preparing the vehicle 301 Spare wheel 285 Flexible fuel vehicles 334 At the gas station 233 Switching fuels 334 Flexible Service System FSS 249 342 Fog lamp front 101 Fog lamp rear 101 294 Fog lamps Replacing bulbs 293 Fog lamps front Messages in display 278 Replacing bulbs 294 Front airbags 61 Front fog lamp Switching on 101 Front lamps Bi Xenon type 296 Halogen type 295 Messages in display 277 279 Replacing bulbs 293 295 Switching on 98 Front seat backrest Folding backrest back 37 Folding backrest forward 36 Front seat head restraints Installing 90 Manual seat 90 Power seat 91 Removing 90 Front seats Heater 93 FSS Flexible Service System Fuel 234 Additives 334 Cruising range 335 E85 Ethanol fuel 335 Fuel reserve warning lamp 262 Gasoline additives 334 Premium unleaded gasoline 234 331 333 Require
40. Press EJ key gt Enter desired channel number using buttons EE to HG AUD _ TXT P82 60 4064 31 170 i Only inputs for available channels are possible If a button is not pressed within four seconds the radio will return to the last station tuned Manual tuning gt Press and hold EXI EN EA or E button until the desired channel has been reached Preset channels You can store up to ten channels e Retrieving a channel from memory gt Press the desired channel button EHN Eee KE Storing channels gt Tune in the desired channel gt Press and hold desired channel but ton EE to BR until a brief signal tone sounds SAT 1 as CH oe FM PTY TXT ALD P82 60 4062 31 The channel is stored on the selected channel button Program type PTY mode In PTY mode you can tune in and select channels of a specific program type Calling up PTY mode gt Start SAT radio mode gt Press the PTY key The name of the channel currently being received is shown Leaving PTY mode gt Press the CH key The number of the channel currently being received is shown Selecting channel category gt Press EN or E button The individual program types are se lected Tuning in a PTY channel Once you have selected a program type you can tune in channels broadcasting a program that corresponds to the selected program type gt Press IXE or BRE button T
41. Remote control integrated into the interior rear view mirror Indicator lamp Signal transmitter button Hand held transmitter button Hand held remote control trans mitter not part of the vehicle equipment Warning A Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate op erator make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage When programming a garage door opener the door moves up or down When program ming a gate operator the gate opens or closes Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safe ty stop and reverse features as required by U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model manufac tured before April 1 1982 A garage door that cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards i Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible with the integrated opener If you should experience diffi culties with programming the transmit ter contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center in the USA only at 1 800 FOR MERCedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 Controls in detail Useful features i For operation in the USA only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subje
42. TWI be come visible at approximately Tig in 1 6 mm we recommend that you do not al low your tires to wear down to that level As tread depth approaches We in 3 mm the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced Warning Depending upon the weather and or road surface conditions the tire traction varies widely Specified tire pressures must be main tained This applies particularly if the tires are subjected to high loads e g high speeds heavy loads high ambient temper atures A Do not drive with a flat tire A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle You may lose control of the vehicle Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build up and possibly a fire Warning Hydroplaning Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road hydroplaning may occur even at low speeds and with new tires Reduce vehicle speed avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain Tire traction The safe speed on a wet snow covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road You should pay particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point AN If ice has formed on the road tire traction will be substantially reduced Under such weather conditions drive steer and brake with extreme caution Warning Operation Dr
43. a com mercially available cleaning cloth Do not use solvents anti static sprays etc for cleaning Replace the CD in its case after use Protect CDs from heat and direct sun light COMPACT DIGITAL AUDIO Only use CDs which bear the label shown and that conform to the compact disc digital audio standard IEC 60908 You can therefore only use CDs with a maxi mum thickness of 1 3 mm 176 i Use of CDs which do not meet this standard may cause damage to the CD changer Do not play single CDs 80 mm with an adapter Your CD drive has been designed to play CDs which correspond to the EN 60908 standard If you insert thicker data carriers e g ones that have data on both sides one side with DVD data the other side with audio data they cannot be ejected and will damage the drive A The CD changer is a Class 1 laser product There is a danger of invisible laser radiation if the cover is opened or damaged Do not remove the cover The CD changer does not contain any parts which can be ser viced by the user For safety reasons have any service work which may be necessary performed only by qualified personnel Warning Operational readiness of CD changer If a CD changer has been installed in the system it can be operated from the front control panel of the radio A loaded maga zine must be installed to play CDs Loading unloading the CD magazine gt Slide changer door to the right and press
44. all four wheels for the winter season Winter tires Always use winter tires at temperatures below 45 F 7 C and whenever wintry road conditions prevail Use of winter tires is the only way to achieve the maximum ef fectiveness of the ABS and ESP in winter operation For safe handling ensure that all mounted winter tires are of the same make and have the same tread design Operation Winter driving A Winter tires with a tread depth under Vie in 4 mm must be replaced They are no long er suitable for winter operation Warning Always observe the speed rating of the winter tires installed on your vehicle If the maximum speed for which your tires are rated is below the speed rating of your ve hicle you must place a notice to this effect where it will be seen by the driver Such no tices are available at your tire dealer or any authorized Mercedes Benz Center Operation Winter driving Snow chains A Please observe the following guidelines Warning when using snow chains Snow chains should only be driven on snow covered roads at speeds not to ex ceed 30 mph 50 km h Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow e Use of snow chains is not permissible If you use your spare tire when winter tires i ET with all wheel tire combinations are fitted on the other wheels be aware that the difference in tire characteristics may very well impair turning stabil
45. and battery checked ESP The ESP is deactivated because of a gt Continue driving with added caution M TROR BOE pune son gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident DISPLAY MALFUNCTION The ESP or the ESP display is gt Continue driving with added caution VISIT WORKSHOP malfunctioning p gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident Practical hints What to do if Symbol messages Display symbol Display message ABS SYSTEM VISIT WORKSHOP DISPLAY MALFUNCTION VISIT WORKSHOP Possible cause The ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off The ESP and the BAS are also deactivated The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available The ABS or the ABS display is malfunctioning Possible solution gt gt Continue driving with added caution Wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident gt Continue driving with added caution Wheels may lock during hard braking reducing steering capability Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to f
46. automatically when the engine is turned on e Parking lamps and low beam head lamps e License plate lamps in low ambient light conditions i If you turn the exterior lamp switch to another position the corresponding lamp s will switch on For safety reasons resetting the LIGHTING submenu to factory settings gt page 120 while driving will not re set the daytime running lamp mode In the display you will then see the mes sage LIGHTING CANNOT BE TOTALLY RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS WHILE DRIVING Setting locator lighting During darkness the following lamps will come on when the exterior lamp switch is in position ERR the locator lighting fea ture is activated and the vehicle is un locked by SmartKey e Parking lamps e Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Front fog lamps To activate locator lighting gt Make sure the function LOCATOR LIGHTING is set gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi tion Bag The locator lighting switches off when the driver s door is opened It switches off au tomatically after a period of approximately 40 seconds Move the selection marker with the or EES button to the LIGHT ING submenu Press button Jj or R repeatedly until you see this message in the dis play LOCATOR LIGHTING The selection marker is on the current setting LOCATOR LIGHTING B OFF P54 32 2199 31 Press or E to select the de sired setting The locator ligh
47. backrest forward i Vehicles with power seat The head restraints will automatically move down Vehicles with manual seat adjustment gt If necessary press the head restraint downward while tilting the backrest forward Folding backrest back gt Fold and press the backrest rearward until it engages in driving position i Vehicles with power seat The head restraint returns to its previous posi tions Vehicles with manual seat adjustment gt Ifnecessary pull the head restraint out while tilting the seat back For more information see Seats gt page 89 Getting started Adjusting Steering wheel A Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv ing Adjusting the steering wheel while driv ing or driving without the adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Warning When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch and lock your vehicle The electrical steering wheel adjustment feature can also be operated with the driv er s door open Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehi cle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Getting started Adjusting Steering wheel adjustment manual Handle gt To unlock the steering column pull handle Q out until its stop limit gt Move steering wheel to the
48. brake pedal the vehicle could acceler ate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Getting started Driving Warning A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi cle control Your vehicle s ABS will not pre vent this type of loss of control Place the gear selector lever in position R only when the vehicle is stopped in order to avoid damaging the transmission Do not run cold engine at high engine speeds Running a cold engine at high speeds may shorten the service life of the engine For more information on driving see Driv ing instructions gt page 223 After a cold start the automatic transmis sion shifts at a higher engine revolution This allows the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature earlier Getting started Driving Switching on headlamps Turn signals i To signal minor directional changes move combination switch to point of resistance only and release The turn signal flashes three times The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column High beam gt Push the combination switch forward The high beam symbol E in the instrument cluster comes on Exterior lamp switch
49. button gt page 151 The indicator lamp on the button goes out Close center air vents Open left and right side air vents gt page 151 and adjust side air vents upwards Deactivating gt Press button Keg gt page 151 The indicator lamp on the button goes out Defrosting is turned off Air recirculation mode Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment AN When the outside temperature is below 41 F 5 C only switch to air recirculation mode for short periods to prevent window fogging Warning Activating gt Press button gt page 151 The indicator lamp on the button comes on i If you keep button pressed the side windows and panorama slid ing pop up roof will close The air recirculation mode is activated automatically at high outside tempera tures If you have turned off the air condition ing gt page 156 or the outside temperature is below 41 F 5 C the air recirculation mode will not switch on automatically A Never operate the windows or panorama sliding pop up roof if there is the possibil ity of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure Warning Vehicles without panorama sliding pop up roof In the event that the procedure causes po tential danger the opening and closing of the
50. cally The switch for the sliding pop up roof and the roller sunblinds is on the over head control panel The roller sunblinds only operate with pan orama sliding pop up roof closed Controls in detail Panorama sliding pop up roof a Open Close gt Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 Opening and closing the roller sun blinds gt To open or close the roller sunblinds move the switch to the resistance point in the required direction to Release the switch when the roller sun blinds have reached the desired posi tion Controls in detail Panorama sliding pop up roof Warning A When closing the roller sunblinds make sure that no one is in danger of being injured by the closing procedure The closing of the roller sunblinds can be immediately halted by releasing the switch Fully opening the roller sunblinds Express open gt Move the panorama sliding pop up roof switch or the rear roller sunblind switch past the resistance point in direction and release The roller sunblinds opens completely Stopping the roller sunblinds gt Move the switch in any direction Opening and closing the panorama sliding pop up roof The panorama sliding pop up roof only op erates with the roller sunblinds opened F a Push up to raise roof at rear Pull down to lower roof at rear Push forward to slide roof closed Push bac
51. cassette CD or radio mode If the telephone is activated in the back ground receiving symbol S visible on dis play the audio souce is muted when a call is received The ringing tone is heard and the caller s telephone number or the name under which this telephone number has been saved in the telephone book appears on the display If the caller s number is not transmitted CALL appears in the display gt Press the SND key to accept the call Muting a call It is possible to mute a call the caller is then no longer able to hear you Mute on gt Press the MUT key Mute off gt Press the MUT key Terminating a call gt Press the END key The current call is terminated Controls in detail Audio system Call waiting If you receive another call during an al ready active call you can accept the sec ond call and switch between the two Accepting a second call gt Press the SND key You are connected with the second caller the first call is muted Switching between the calls gt Press the SND key Terminating the second call gt Press the END key The current call will be terminated You are connected with the muted call again Controls in detail Power windows Vv Power windows Opening and closing the windows The side windows can be opened and closed electrically The switches for all the side windows are on the driver s door The switch for the passenger door is on t
52. control eeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 194 loadin E ereenn asrus eini 197 Roof rack sonrie 197 Luggage COVE 197 Split rear bench seat ee 197 Loading instructions 199 Useful features seesseessseesseeesseessess 200 Interior storage Spaces n 200 ASNA YS oeeoiieacie 203 Cigarette lighter ee 204 Telephone 0 0 0 seceeesceeesrseesseeees 205 Tele Aid eseeeceeseeeseeseseeeeeeeeees 206 Garage door Opener sses 214 aS Operation ceccccccceeesstteeeeeeees The first 1000 miles 1500km 222 Driving instructions eee 223 Drive sensibly save fuel 223 Drinking and driving 223 Pedals cis fcccereieniavacea s tacasieeaietie 223 Power assistance eee 223 Brak S eorne 224 Driving OTS sresrrussrisi senei nesesito 225 P rkih Eunereis 225 Mirese oree eA 226 Hydroplaning eeeseeesseeeesseeeees 227 Tire traction ooo eeeesseeeseeeeeeeeeeees 227 Tire speed rating eee 228 Winter driving instructions 228 Standing water eee 229 Passenger compartment 230 Driving abroad eee 230 Control and operation of radio transmitter eee 230 Catalytic converter 231 Emission control n se 231 Coolant temperature eee 232 At the gas station 0 eee 233 RETUCIING cess csaveenescscctevsotevess ance 233 Check regularly and before a long trip ee 234 Engine compartment c eee 236 HOO E ETT 236
53. control panel P83 30 3789 Controls in detail Climate control Item Air volume control Left side temperature control Right side temperature control Air distribution control switch Rear window defroster AC cooling on off AcOFF Air distribution and air volume automatic good Air recirculation Defrosting The storage compartment between the front seats can be ventilated gt page 157 For information on rear passenger com partment adjustable air vents see Rear passenger compartment adjustable air vents gt page 158 Controls in detail Climate control The climate control is operational whenev er the engine is running You can operate the climate control system in either the au tomatic or manual mode The system cools or heats the interior depending on the se lected interior temperature and the cur rent outside temperature Warning VAN When operating the climate control the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents in the footwell can be very hot or very cold depending on the set temperature This may case burns or frost bite on unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell air vents If necessary change the air flow using the air distribution controls to direct the air away from the foot well air vents gt page 153 Nearly all dust particl
54. firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pul sation Continuous steady brake pedal pressure yields the advantages provided by the ABS namely braking power and the ability to steer the vehicle The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica tion of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving Safety and Security Driving safety systems Emergency brake maneuver gt Keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal Warning A The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency be yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The ca pabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or danger ous manner which could jeopardize the us er s safety or the safety of others For more information see Practical hints gt page 258 BAS The Brake Assist System BAS operates in emergency situations If you apply the brakes very quickly the BAS automatically provides full brake boost thereby poten tially reducing the braking distance Apply continuous full braking pressure until the emergen
55. have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks Driving with this message displayed can result in an accident Have your brake system checked immediately Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire You can be seriously burned 270 The brake pads have reached their wear gt Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible Risk of accident Stop the vehicle and notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not add brake fluid This will not solve the problem Brake pad thickness must be visually checked by a qualified technican at the intervals specified in the Service booklet Display symbol Display message COOLANT CHECK LEVEL A Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts Warning Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may ignite and burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts You can be seriously burned Practical hints Possible cause The coolant level is too low gt gt aa Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system The engine will overheat causing major engine damage What to do if
56. in canada Canada only Your vehicle is factory equipped with H rated tires which have a speed rating of 130 mph 210 km h An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph 210 km h i For information on tire speed rating for winter tires see Winter driving gt page 247 Winter driving instructions The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration braking and steering maneuvers Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions When the vehicle is in danger of skidding move gear selector lever to position N or in case of manual transmission declutch Try to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action i For information on driving with snow chains see Snow chains gt page 248 A On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi cle control Your vehicle s ABS will not pre vent this type of loss of control Warning Road salts and chemicals can adversely af fect braking efficiency Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal braking effect Depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt strewn roads can bring road salt impaired braking efficiency back to normal If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt treate
57. in direction of arrow until cup To open storage compartment holder engages Armrest Lowering armrest f 2 Ea n S gt Pull handle to lower armrest Opening storage compartment gt Pull handle and lift armrest Closing storage compartment gt Press armrest down until it engages into place i Vehicles with climate control The storage compartment can be heat ed or cooled The compartment can get very warm due to its confined space When storing heat sensitive objects in the compart ment close the air vent gt page 157 while heating the passenger compart ment Vehicles with climate control Do not obstruct the air vent in the storage compartment Parcel net in front passenger footwell A small convenience parcel net is located in the front passenger footwell It is for small and light items such as road maps mail etc A Do not place heavy or fragile objects or ob jects having sharp edges in the parcel net Warning In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers they could be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants Controls in detail Useful features Ashtrays Center console ashtray j Zn Opening ashtray gt Briefly touch cover plate Q The ashtray opens automatically Controls in detail Useful features Removing ashtray insert Rear seat ashtray Cigarette lighter Warning AN Remove front ashtr
58. in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in inju ry Improper work on the restraint systems in cluding incorrect installation and removal can lead to possible injury through an unin tended activation of the SRS In addition through improper work there is a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment Work on the SRS must therefore only be per formed by qualified technicians Contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A Airbags are designed to reduce the potential of injury and fatality in certain frontal impacts front airbags or side impacts side impact airbags and head protection window curtain airbags However no system avail able today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities The activation of the SRS temporarily releas es a small amount of dust from the airbags This dust however is neither injurious to your health nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle The dust might cause some tempo rary breathing difficulty for people with asth ma or other breathing trouble To avoid this you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the airbag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or door Warning A To reduce the risk of injury when the front airbags inflate it is very important for the
59. in the SOS button stays on after turning SmartKey in starter switch to position 2 and the message TELE AID EMREG CALL NOT ACTIVATED will be shown in the multifunction display for approx ten seconds If you have any questions regarding ac tivation please call the Response Cen ter at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada The Tele Aid system Telematic Alarm Identification on De mand The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response e automatic and manual emergency e roadside assistance and e information The Tele Aid system is operational provid ing that the vehicle s battery is charged properly connected not damaged and cel lular and GPS coverage is available The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted when using the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel To raise press button and to lower press button EEJ gt To activate press the SOS button the Roadside Assistance button or the Information button Ry depend ing on the type of response required oO The SOS button is located above the in side rear view mirror The Roadside Assistance button and the Information button are located below the center armrest cov er Shortly after the completion of your Ac quaintance Call you will receive a user ID and password via first call mail By visiting www mbusa com and selecting Tele Aid USA only you will have access to account informat
60. in the multifunction display REACH MAX OIL LEVEL message will appear gt Press button REg or EaI on the Canada 1 5 LITERS i ieee steering wheel until the following SWITCH ON IGNITION message is seen in the multifunction e ADD 2 0 Qts 10 gt Switch on the ignition eis REACH MAX OIL LEVEL anion display ENGINE OIL LEVEL Canada cs LITERS MEASURING NOW MEASURE CORRECT ONLY IF VEH LEVEL If you see the message OBSERVE WAITING PERIOD gt If engine is at normal operating temperature wait five minutes before repeating check procedure gt If engine is not yet at normal operating temperature wait 30 minutes before repeating check procedure If you see the message ENGINE OIL LEVEL NOT WHEN ENGINE ON gt Turn off the engine gt Ifthe engine is at normal operating temperature wait five minutes before checking oil gt If the engine is not yet at normal operating temperature you must wait 30 minutes before checking oil If there is excess engine oil with the engine at normal operating temperature the following message will appear ENGINE OIL LEVEL REDUCE OIL LEVEL gt Have excess oil siphoned or drained off Contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty For more information on messages in the display concerning engine oil se
61. ing and side marker lamp Rear fog lamp driv er s side Type 5W5 LED CoW P21W PY21W P21 5W P21 4W Notes on bulb replacement Warning VAN Keep bulbs out of reach of children Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot Al low the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas A bulb can explode if you e touch or move it when hot e drop the bulb e scratch the bulb Wear eye and hand protection Because of high voltage in xenon lamps it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician Use only 12 volt bulbs of the same type and with the specified watt rating Switch lights off before changing a bulb to prevent short circuits Always use a clean lint free cloth when handling bulbs Your hands should be dry and free of oil and grease If the newly installed bulb does not come on visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Have the LEDs and bulbs for the follow ing lamps replaced by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center e Additional turn signals in the exteri or rear view mirrors e High mounted brake lamp e Xenon lamps e Front fog lamps Replacing bulbs for front lamps Halogen headlamps Bulb socket for turn signal lamp 2 Headlamp cover for high beam head lamp and for parking and standing lamp Headlamp cover for low beam head lamp P82 10
62. least 45 anticor rosion antifreeze equivalent to freeze protection to approx 22 F 30 C If you use a solution that is more than 55 anticorrosion antifreeze freeze protec tion to approx 49 F 45 C the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution Therefore do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion antifreeze If the coolant level is low water and MB 325 0 anticorrosion antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level have cooling system checked for signs of leakage Please make sure the mixture is in accordance with label instructions The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water If you are not sure about the water quality con sult your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Anticorrosion antifreeze Your vehicle contains a number of alumi num parts The use of aluminum compo nents in motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifical ly formulated to protect the aluminum Anticorrosion antifreeze quantity Model C 230 Kompressor cC 320 parts Failure to use such anticorro sion antifreeze coolant will result in a sig nificantly shortened service life Therefore the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle Mercedes Benz 325 0 Anticorrosion Anti freeze agent Approx fre
63. mirror is selected Controls in detail Memory function Adjust the exterior rear view mirror with button Q so that you see the rear wheel and the curb Press memory button M 3 on the door Within three seconds press bottom of adjustment button above the exteri or lamp switch The parking position is stored if the mirror does not move i If the mirror does move repeat the above steps After the setting is stored you can move the mirror again Controls in detail Lighting V Lighting For information on how to switch on the Exterior lamp switch headlamps and use the turn signals see the Getting started section gt page 48 The exterior lamp switch is located on the o dashboard to the left of the steering wheel X Parking lamps also side marker _ z lamps tail lamps license plate If you drive in countries where vehicles 1 lamps instrument panel lamps drive on the other side of the road than Canada only When engine is run the country where the vehicle is regis ning the low beam is also switched tered you must have the headlamps on modified for symmetrical low beams Relevant information can be obtained at your authorized Mercedes Benz Cen ter EJ Off Wg Automatic headlamp mode Ex Low beam plus parking lamps or high beam headlamps combination switch pushed forward ea Standing lamps right turn left one stop Sea Standing lamps left turn left
64. of such parts and acces sories could adversely affect the safety performance or reliability of your vehicle Please do not use them Introduction Product information Genuine Mercedes Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories ap proved by us are available at your autho rized Mercedes Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive information also on permissible technical modifications and where proper installation will be per formed Introduction Operator s Manual Vv Operator s Manual This Operator s Manual contains a great deal of useful information We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle we urge you to follow the in structions and warnings contained in this manual Ignoring them could result in dam age to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others Vehicle damage caused by fail ure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual Therefore you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment your au thorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper proce dures We continuously strive to improve our product and ask for your understanding that we reserv
65. of the seat Emergency tensioning device ETD The seat belts are equipped with emergen cy tensioning devices and belt force limit ers The ETD is designed to activate in the fol lowing cases when the seat belts are fas tened e in frontal or rear end impacts exceed ing a preset severity level e ifthe restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly see Eg indicator lamp gt page 56 In an impact emergency tensioning devic es remove slack from the belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly against the body Belt force limiters reduce the force exerted by the seat belts on oc cupants during a crash A An emergency tensioning device ETD that was activated must be replaced Warning When disposing of the emergency tension ing device our safety instructions must be followed These are available at your autho rized Mercedes Benz Center Do not place objects heavier than 20 Ibs 9kg on the front passenger seat This could cause the front or side impact airbag on the front passenger side to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system s deployment threshold Children in the vehicle If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle e Secure the child using an infant or child restraint appropriate to the age and size of the child and recommended for use by Mercedes Benz e Ensure that the infant or child is prop erly secured by a belt at all times while the
66. oline operation i Use of E85 may reduce your driving range Maintenance Please inform your Mercedes Benz Center if you use or have used E85 fuel when your vehicle is delivered for maintenance or re pairs Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Coolants The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion antifreeze which pro vides e Corrosion protection e Freeze protection e Boiling protection by increasing the boiling point The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately 22 F 30 C and corro sion protection If the antifreeze mixture is effective to 22 F 30 C the boiling point of the cool ant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approximately 266 F 130 C The coolant solution must be used year round to provide the necessary corro sion protection and increase boil over pro tection Refer to Service Booklet for replacement interval Coolant system design and coolant used stipulate the replacement interval The replacement interval published in the Ser vice Booklet is only applicable if MB 325 0 anticorrosion antifreeze solution or other Mercedes Benz approved products of equal specification see Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet are used to re new the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper level To provide important corrosion protection the solution must be at
67. only engine oils approved by Mercedes Benz Information on approved products is available in the Factory Ap proved Service Products pamphlet or at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Always check the oil filler cap gt page 240 for important informa tion pertaining to the engine oil need ing to meet a specific Mercedes Benz specification e g MB 229 5 If such information is printed on the oil filler cap only use an engine oil from the list of approved engine oils in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet that meets the specification indicated on the oil filler cap Using engine oils of other specification may cause the FSS to incorrectly deter mine the next service interval and will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Please follow FSS recommendations for scheduled oil changes Failure to do so could result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Engine oil additives Do not blend oil additives with engine oil They may damage the engine Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant R 134a HFC refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil is used in the air condition ing system Never use R 12 CFC or mineral based lu bricating oil Otherwise damage to the system will occur Brake fluid During vehicle operation the boiling
68. perature may rise close to approx 248 F 120 C The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature over 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause serious en gine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Warning A Driving when your engine is badly over heated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine com partment to catch fire You could be se riously burned Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until it has cooled down Turn off the engine get out of the vehi cle and do not stand near the vehicle un til it has cooled down V At the gas station Refueling AN Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous It burns violently and can cause serious inju ry Whenever you are around gasoline avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact extinguish all smoking materials Never allow sparks flame or smoking materials near gasoline Warning A Flexible Fuel Vehicles identified by a label reading Premium gasoline or E85 only on fuel filler flap Ethanol fuel E85 and its vapors are highly flammable poisonous and burn easily Etha nol fuel can cause serious injuries if ignited or if you come into contact with it or inhale fumes of it Avoid inhalation o
69. point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere Under extremely strenu ous operating conditions this moisture content can lead to the formation of bub bles in the system thus reducing the sys tem s efficiency Therefore the brake fluid must be re placed every two years preferably in the spring Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes Benz is recommended Your au thorized Mercedes Benz Center will pro vide you with additional information Premium unleaded gasoline To maintain the engine s durability and performance premium unleaded gaso line must be used If premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used follow these precautions e Have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon as possible e Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration e Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two per sons and no luggage e Do not exceed 213 of maximum ac celerator pedal position if the vehi cle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain Fuel requirements Flexible Fuel Vehicles identified by a label reading Premium gasoline or E85 only on fuel filler flap are de signed to operate on premium unlead ed gasoline or Ethanol fuel E85 or any mixture of these two See notes on Flexible Fuel Vehicles g
70. reach of children Warning If a battery is swallowed seek medical help immediately Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling a ae 4 P80 35 2112 31 Mechanical key Battery compartment Replacement batteries Lithium type CR 2025 or equivalent i When changing batteries always re place both batteries The required replacement batteries are available at any Mercedes Benz Center gt Remove mechanical key gt page 288 gt Insert mechanical key Q in side open ing and push grey slide The battery compartment is unlatched gt Pullthe battery compartment out of the key housing in direction of arrow P80 35 2075 31 Battery Contact spring gt Remove the batteries gt Using a lint free cloth insert new bat teries under the contact spring with the plus side facing up gt Return battery compartment into hous ing until it locks in place gt Slide mechanical key Q back into the SmartKey When inserting the batteries make sure they are clean and free of lint Fuel filler flap In case the central locking system does not release the fuel filler flap you can open it manually gt Open the trunk lid Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency F
71. side windows can be immediately halted by pressing or pulling the respective window switch Vehicles with panorama sliding pop up roof In the event that the procedure causes po tential danger the opening and closing of the side windows can be immediately halted by releasing the button or by pressing or pulling the respective window switch The opening and closing of the panorama sliding pop up roof can be immediately halted by releasing the button or by moving the panorama sliding pop up roof switch in the overhead control panel in any direction Deactivating gt Press button gt page 151 The indicator lamp on the button goes out j If you keep button pressed the side windows and panorama slid L ing pop up roof will return to their previous position The air recirculation mode is deactivated automatically e after five minutes if the outside temper ature is below approximately 41 F 5 C e after five minutes if the air conditioning is turned off e after 30 minutes if the outside temper ature is above approximately 41 F 5 C Controls in detail Climate control At outside temperatures above 79 F 26 C the system will not automatically switch back to outside air A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes Deactivating the climate control sys tem Deactivating gt Set the air volume control gt page 151 to position 0 The indicato
72. signal will sound after 20 seconds if the display panel is left in the down position Fold display panel back up If the display panel is not closed a warning signal will sound and the radio will be muted Track selection TRE NR AUD SB P82 60 4072 31 gt Press the TRK key The current track will be displayed as SIDE 1 or SIDE 2 gt You can switch sides at any time The side will be changed automatically at the end of the tape Cassette eject gt Press eject button The display folds down and the cas sette is ejected The system will switch back to radio mode automatically gt Fold display panel back up and press gently on the display panel frame to lock it H Do not press directly on the display face Otherwise the display will be damaged i The cassette will not be ejected when the system is switched off or switched to another operating mode Track search Track search forward TRE WR AUD SB P82 60 4073 31 gt Press IXE button SEEK FWD will appear in the display Track search will run the tape forward to the start of the next track and switch to Play i The beginning of a track can only be found if there is pause of at least four seconds between tracks Controls in detail Audio system Track search backward gt Press KJ button SEEK RWD will appear on the display Track search will run the tape back ward to the start of the track currently play
73. signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the inte grated signal transmitter to pick up the sig nal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner If you live in Canada or if you are having dif ficulties programming a gate operator re gardless of where you live by using the programming procedures replace step 4 with the following Step 4 gt Continue to press and hold the inte grated signal transmitter button or while you press and re press cycle your hand held remote con trol transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned Upon successful training the indicator lamp will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds gt Proceed with programming step 5 and step 6 to complete Operation of integrated remote control gt Switch on ignition gt Select and press the appropriate inte grated signal transmitter button Q or to activate the remote con trolled device The integrated remote control trans mitter continues to send the signal as long as the button is pressed up to 20 seconds Erasing the integrated remote control memory gt Switch on ignition gt Simultaneously hold down the signal transmitter buttons and for ap proximately 20 seconds until the indi cator lamp blin
74. switch forward or backward in the direction of arrow until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel Seat height gt Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 2 Getting started Adjusting Head restraint height gt Press the switch up or down in the di rection of arrow Q AN For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Warning Adjust head restraint so that the head re straint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an ac cident or similar situation Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intend ed to help reduce injuries during an acci dent Head restraint tilt Folding front seat backrest forward _ l Manually adjust the angle of the head re straint Release lever i In addition to the front seat backrests the front seat cushions can also be shifted forward to permit easy access to the rear whenever the seat is located in the rear half of its adjustment range Swivel backrest forward by pulling the release lever until the seat moves ina combined forward and upward move ment gt Push or pull on the lower edge of the head restraint cushion For more information see Seats gt page 89 Folding backrest forward gt Pull release lever Q forward and fold the seat
75. the start of that track If it has been playing for less than ten seconds it will revert to the preceding track Pressing the EXE or ER button repeat edly will result in multiple tracks being skipped Fast forward reverse e Fast forward gt Press and hold EN button until desired point has been reached 178 e Fast reverse gt Press and hold iy button until desired point has been reached i The relative time of the track is shown on the display during the search Scanning e Starting scan gt Press button CD 2 5C TRACE amp PDM PPT GUD T SC appears in the display Each track on the current CD will be played for approx eight seconds in ascending order e Ending scan gt Press Fel EN Iva IE or E button Random play The random play function RDM plays the tracks on the current CD in random order e Switching on random play Co 2 eer a RRR d RDM RPT AUD P82 60 4067 31 gt Press the RDM key RDM is highlighted in the display e Switching off random play gt Press the RDM key The highlighted RDM in the display disappears Repeat The repeat function RPT repeats the cur rent track Switching on repeat RDM gt Press the RPT key RPT AUD P82 60 4067 31 RPT is highlighted in the display Switching off repeat gt Press the RPT key The highlighted RPT in the display dis appears i The Random play and Repeat function cannot be
76. the ve hicle Adapt your driving accordingly When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground please note the follow ing With the automatic central locking acti vated and the SmartKey in starter switch position 2 the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approx 9 mph 15 km h or more Switch off the tow away alarm gt page 79 To prevent the vehicle doors from lock ing deactivate the automatic central locking gt page 129 Towing of the vehicle should only be done using the properly installed tow ing eye bolt Never attach tow cable tow rope or tow rod to vehicle chassis frame or suspension parts Practical hints Towing the vehicle i If the battery is disconnected or dis charged e the SmartKey will not turn in the starter switch See notes on the battery gt page 307 or on jump starting gt page 310 e the gear selector lever will remain locked in position P See notes on manual unlocking of gear selector lever gt page 291 Practical hints Towing the vehicle Installing towing eye bolt To remove cover gt Press mark on cover in direction of ar row gt Lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for towing eye bolt The towing eye bolt is supplied with the tool kit located in the wheel well below the trunk floor P88 20 2282 31 gt Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and tighte
77. the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsu pervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning VAN Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat except in a Mercedes Benz authorized BabySmart compatible child seat which operates with the BabySmart system installed in the ve hicle to deactivate the passenger front air bag when it is properly installed Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it in flates in a crash If this happens serious or fatal injury will result TM According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing positions Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system which is properly secured with the vehicle s seat belt and top tether strap or secured via lower anchors and top tether strap fully in accordance with the child seat manufactur er s instructions Getting started Adjusting Grid oacconecnousonmelmuncnn Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat cushion tilt significantly increased if the child restraints gt Lift handle gt Turn handwheel G forward or back are not properly secured in the vehicle and ward until your upper legs are lightly oe i k gt Slide seat to the desired position the child is not properly secured in the child supported re
78. to a thermometer placed next to the sensor not by comparison to external displays e g bank signs etc When moving the vehicle into colder ambi ent temperatures e g when leaving your garage you will notice a delay before the lower temperature is displayed A delay also occurs when ambient temper atures rise This prevents inaccurate tem perature indications caused by heat radiated from the engine during idling or slow driving Vv Control system The control system is activated as soon as the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position 1 The control system enables you to e call up information about your vehicle e change vehicle settings For example you can use the control sys tem to find out when your vehicle is next due for service to set the language for messages in the instrument cluster dis play and much more i The displays for the audio systems ra dio CD player cassette player will ap pear in English regardless of the language selected Warning VAN A driver s attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others se lecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions per mit it to be done safely Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet appr
79. transmission selects indi vidual gears automatically depending on e the gear selector lever position D with gear ranges 4 3 2 1 gt page 141 e the selected shift program C S gt page 144 e the position of the accelerator pedal gt page 145 e the vehicle speed The current gear selector lever position and shift program C S appear in the multifunction display gt page 109 An additional indication of the current gear selector lever position can be found on the cover of the shifting gate The indicators come on when you activate a switch e g unlocking the vehicle or opening a door and go out after approximately 15 minutes Controls in detail Automatic transmission A It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Warning When the gear selector lever is in position D you can influence transmission shifting by e limiting the gear range e changing gears manually Controls in detail Automatic transmission One touch gearshifting Even with an automatic transmission you can change the gears manually when the gear selector lever is i
80. two stops i If you remove the SmartKey and open the driver s door while the parking lamps or low beam headlamps are switched on e awarning sounds E appears in the multifunction display e the message TURN OFF LIGHTS appears in the multifunction display i With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the engine running the low beam headlamps cannot be switched off manually Manual headlamp mode The low beam headlamps and parking lamps can be switched on and off with the exterior lamp switch Automatic headlamp mode The parking lamps low beam headlamps and license plate lamps switch on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to RJ A If the exterior lamp switch is set to Mg Warning e the headlamps may switch off unexpect edly when the system senses bright am bient light for example light from oncoming traffic e the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions Controls in detail Lighting To minimize risk to you and to others acti vate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to when driving or when traffic and or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so In low ambient lighting conditions only switch from position ERR to with the vehicle at a standstill Switching from EGR to will briefly switch off the head lamps Doing so while driving in low ambient lighti
81. unattend ed in the vehicle or with access to an un locked vehicle Children could release the parking brake which could result in an acci dent and or serious injury gt Release the parking brake by pulling on handle Q The indicator lamp USA only or OJ Canada only in the instrument cluster goes out Driving gt gt v Depress brake pedal Move gear selector lever to position D or R manual transmission first or re verse gear Release the brake pedal Carefully depress the accelerator pedal Once the vehicle is in motion the auto matic central locking system engages and the locking knobs drop down i You can open a locked door from the inside Open doors only when condi tions are safe to do so You can deactivate the automatic lock ing using the control system gt page 129 If you hear a warning signal when driv ing off you have forgotten to release the parking brake Release the parking brake Simultaneously depressing the acceler ator pedal and applying the brake re duces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear i Vehicles with automatic transmission Wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion Warning A Vehicles with automatic transmission It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the
82. unlock When a Tele Aid call has been initiated In case you have locked your vehicle unin the audio system or the COMAND sys tem audio is muted and the selected mode radio tape or CD pauses The tentionally e g SmartKey inside vehicle and the reserve key is not handy i optonaicellular phone if installed gt Contact the Mercedes Benz Response The remote door unlock feature is avail i Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA able if the relevant cellular phone net Syitclies Olle I VOW MHSE Use Tia or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada work is available phone the vehicle must be parked Dis i i connect the coiled cord and place the You will be asked to provide your pass The SOS button will flash and the call The COMAND navigation system word which you provided when you message EMERGENCY CALL if engaged will continue to run The completed the subscriber agreement CALL CONNECTED will appear in the mul display in the instrument cluster is gt Then return to your vehicle and pull the tifunction display to indicate receipt of available for use and spoken com mands are only available by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND unit A pop up window will appear in the COMAND display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress trunk lid recessed handle for minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing The message EMERGENCY CALL CALL CONNECTED appears in the multi function display As
83. used simultaneously Track and time display CD 2 Tat 82246 RDM gt Press the T key RPT AUD T P82 60 4070 31 The number of the track being played and the elapsed playing time appear in the display gt Press the T key The total number of tracks and the total playing time of the CD appear in the display The CD main menu appears again after eight seconds Controls in detail Audio system Telephone operation Various car telephone functions and op erating steps for the car telephone can be performed and displayed via the audio sys tem Further operating instructions not covered here can be found in the operating instructions for the multifunction steering wheel voice control and the telephone 179 Controls in detail Audio system Switching on the telephone gt Press button If you have programmed an unlock code for the telephone you must enter the code now Enter the desired telephone number using buttons EN to EJ If necessary correct number entered with the CLR key Press key briefly to delete the last digit entered press key and hold to delete the complete num ber Press the 0K key after entering correct code The telephone is unlocked If you have entered the wrong code you must re peat the entering procedure with the correct code Switching off the telephone gt Press button repeatedly until PHONE OFF appears in the display
84. vehicle checked Problem The yellow ESP warning lamp comes on while driving The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while driving Possible cause The ESP is deactivated Risk of accident Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions The ESP or traction control has come into Operation because of detected traction loss in at least one tire Practical hints What to do if Suggested solution gt Switch the ESP back on gt page 77 If the ESP cannot be switched back on have the system checked at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt When driving off apply as little throttle as possible gt While driving ease up on the accelerator gt Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions gt Do not deactivate the ESP Exceptions gt page 75 Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident Practical hints What to do if Problem The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp comes on while driving The red seat belt non usage warning lamp illuminates for a brief period after starting the en gine The red SRS indicator lamp comes on while driving A In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi cated as outlined above the SRS may not be operational For your safety we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately to have the syst
85. whether your telephone is switched on or off e If the telephone is off the message in the multifunction display is TEL OFF e Ifthe telephone is on The telephone will then search for a network During this time the display is empty As soon as the telephone has found a network READY is indicated in the dis play TEL READY 72 F Signal strength This standby message indicates that your telephone is ready for use and you can op erate it using the control system i Vehicles with Audio system the signal strength is indicated in the top right corner for example S9 The higher the number the stronger the signal from the cellular network Vehicles with COMAND the signal strength is indicated by bars in the top left corner The higher the number of bars the stronger the signal from cellular network Controls in detail Control system Answering a call When your telephone is ready to receive calls you can answer a Call at any time In the display you will then see the message TEL FY CAJ 1 72 F a 10 30a gt Press button K You have answered the call In the dis play you see the length of the call Ending a call gt Press button EN You have ended the call In the display you will again see the standby mes sage Controls in detail Control system Dialing a number from the phone book If your telephone is ready to receive calls
86. will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Report the loss of the SmartKey or the mechanical key immediately to your car insurance company gt If necessary have the mechanical lock replaced Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to supply you with a replace ment Opening the doors from the inside You can open a locked door from the in side Open door only when conditions are safe to do so P72 10 2473 31 Q Locking knob Inside door handle gt Pull on door handle If door was locked locking knob Q will move up i If the vehicle has previously been locked from the outside with the SmartKey opening a door from the in side will trigger the alarm To cancel the alarm do one of the fol lowing e Press button oria on the SmartKey e Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Opening the trunk lid A minimum height clearance of 7 1 ft 2 16 m is required to open the trunk lid The handle is located above the rear li cense plate recess Handle gt Pull on handle and lift the trunk lid Hi The trunk lid swings open upwards au tomatically Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Trunk lid emergency release i i I The vehicle must be unlocked warning A The emergency release button is
87. you give more gas The engine then operates at lower rpms and the S Sport For standard driving wheels are less likely to spin C Comfort For comfort driving e The power transmission ratio for gear selector lever position R changes depending on the program mode selected S or C Program mode selector switch Accelerator position Your driving style influences the transmission s shifting behavior Less throttle Earlier upshifting More throttle Later upshifting Kickdown Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration gt Press the accelerator past the point of resistance The transmission shifts into a lower gear gt Ease onthe accelerator when you have reached the desired speed The transmission shifts up again Controls in detail Automatic transmission Emergency operation Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the trans mission is most likely operating in limp home emergency operation mode In this mode only second gear and reverse gear can be activated Stop the vehicle v Move gear selector lever to P v Turn off the engine Wait at least ten seconds before restarting v v Restart the engine gt Move gear selector lever to position D for second gear or R gt Have the transmission checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Controls in detail Good visibility YV Good visib
88. your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled Without your seat belt buckled you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt The airbags can only protect as ex pected if the occupants are using their seat belts gt page 56 Getting started Driving Warning VAN Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat except in a Mercedes Benz authorized BabySmart compatible child seat which operates with the BabySmart system installed in the ve hicle to deactivate the passenger front air bag when it is properly installed Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it in flates in a crash If this happens serious or fatal injury will result TM According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing positions Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system which is properly secured with the vehicle s seat belt and top tether strap or secured via lower anchors and top tether strap fully in accordance with the child seat manufactur er s instructions gt D gt D Getting started Driving A child s risk of serious or
89. 0 2574 31 Rear interior lights i Right front reading lamp Rocker switch for automatic control system Left front reading lamp If the door remains open the interior lamps switch off automatically after ap proximately five minutes when the SmartKey is removed or in the starter switch position 0 An interior lamp switched on manually does not go out automatically Controls in detail Lighting Deactivating automatic control gt Press the fama symbol on rocker switch The interior lighting remains switched off even when you e unlock the vehicle e open a door e remove the SmartKey from the starter switch Manual control Switching all front interior lights on and off gt Press the symbol on rocker switch The front interior lights come on gt Press rocker switch to center postion to activate the automatic control Controls in detail Lighting Switching rear interior lights on and off gt Press button E J The lights in the rear passenger compartment come on Press button E fagain The lights in the rear passenger compartment go out Switching right front reading lamp on and off gt Press right button EES The right reading lamp comes on Press right button again gt The right reading lamp goes out Switching left front reading lamp on and off gt Press left button JEG The left reading lamp comes on Press left button again gt The le
90. 253 Replacing bulbs 294 298 Tar stains 252 Technical data 332 Brake fluid 332 Coolant 330 Coolants 336 Electrical system 327 Engine 324 Engine oil 332 Engine oil additives 332 Flexible fuel vehicles 334 Fuel requirements 333 Fuels 330 Gasoline additives 334 Lubricants 330 Main dimensions 328 Premium unleaded gasoline 333 Rims and tires 325 Weights 329 Windshield and headlamp washer system 331 338 Tele Aid Information 211 Initiating an emergency call manually 209 Roadside assistance 210 Tele Aid System 206 Tele Aid System 345 Tele Aid 206 Emergency calls 208 Messages in display 283 Remote door unlock 213 Stolen vehicle tracking services 214 System self check 207 Upgrade signals 212 Telephone 24 205 Answering acall 135 Dialing a number from the phone book 136 Emergency call 184 Ending a call 135 Hands free microphone 27 Loading phone book 136 Messages in display 283 Operating 134 Operation 179 Redialing 136 Temperature coolant temperature indicator 106 Display mode 123 Grades of tires 340 Setting interior temperature 153 Setting units in display 123 Tires 246 Tightening torque 345 Tightening torque Wheel bolts 306 Tilt Backrest 33 Head restraint 34 36 Seat cushion 33 Time Setting hours 122 Setting minutes 122 Time display Setting 123 Tire inflation pressure Checking 235 245 Tire speed rating 228 345 Tire traction 227 Tires 244 325 Collapsible 342 Consumer information 339 Dire
91. 3 Upper part 25 Centigrade Setting temperature units 123 Central locking From inside 88 Switch 88 Switching on off control system 129 Unlocking from inside 88 Central locking switch 88 Changing Batteries SmartKey Key setting 129 Changing CDs 175 Charging Vehicle battery 308 CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator lamp 260 Check gas cap Message in display 277 290 Checking Coolant level 235 241 Oillevel 235 237 Tire inflate pressure 235 Vehicle lighting 235 Child safety 65 Airbags 58 Infant and child restraint systems 62 65 LATCH child seat mounts 70 Child seat mounts see LATCH child seat mounts 70 Cigarette lighter 204 Cleaning Cup holder 255 Gear selector lever 255 Hard plastic trim items 255 Headlamps 148 Headliner and shelf below rear window 255 Instrument cluster 255 Leather upholstery 256 Light alloy wheels 254 MB Tex upholstery 256 Plastic and rubber parts 256 Seat belts 255 Steering wheel 255 Upholstery 256 Windows 254 Windshield 50 Wiper blades 254 Wood trims 256 Climate control 150 Adjusting 153 Defogging windshield 153 Defrosting 154 Rear window defroster 149 Setting the temperature 153 Clock 23 122 Closing Glove box 200 Hood 237 power window with SmartKey 188 Roller sunblind for the sliding pop up roof 189 Side windows 187 Sliding pop up roof Trunk lid 86 Windows 186 Windows with SmartKey 188 Closing sliding pop up roof Inanemergency 292 Cockpit 20 341 Cockpit manag
92. 3318 31 P82 10 3317 31 Low beam bulb High beam bulb Parking and standing lamp Low and high beam bulb gt gt gt Switch off the lights Open the hood gt page 236 Turn headlamp cover 2 or to the left and remove Turn bulb holder with bulb to the left and pull out Pull out the bulb from the base do not pull on glass tube Practical hints Replacing bulbs Insert new bulb so that the base fits in the bulb holder recess and is level Place the bulb holder with bulb on the headlamp mounting and turn the bulb holder to the right until it engages Replace headlamp cover or 3 and turn to the right until it engages Front turn signal lamp bulb gt gt gt Switch off the lights Open the hood gt page 236 Turn bulb socket to the left and pull out Push bulb into socket turn to the left and remove Insert new bulb in socket push in and turn to the right Reinsert bulb socket in lamp and turn to the right Practical hints Replacing bulbs Parking and standing lamp bulb gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Switch off the lights Open the hood gt page 236 Turn headlamp cover 2 to the left and remove Pull out the bulb socket with the bulb Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket Insert a new bulb in the socket Reinstall the bulb socket Replace headlamp cover 2 and turn to the right until it engages i
93. AN Various warning labels are attached to your vehicle These warning labels are intended to make you and others aware of various risks You should not remove any of these warning labels unless explicitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself Removal of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and or personal injury Introduction Problems with your vehicle Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation we urge you to immediately contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction please discuss the problem with the Mercedes Benz Center management or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes Benz USA LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes Benz Canada Inc 849 Eglinton Avenue East Toronto Ontario M4G 2L5 Introduction Reporting safety defects Reporting safety defects For the USA only The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49 Code of U S Federal Regulations Part 575 pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 Reporting Safety Defects I
94. BAS or the BAS display is gt Continue driving with added caution meltunetoning gt Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident Practical hints What to do if Display message ESP ESP NOT AVAILABLE When synchronizing the ESP make sure you can turn the steering wheel in both directions as far as it will go without the wheels hitting any objects e g a road curb Possible cause The ESP was deactivated because of a malfunction or interrupted power supply The ABS might not be operational The self diagnosis has not been completed Possible solution gt Synchronize the ESP With vehicle sta tionary and the engine running turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right If the ESP message does not go out gt Continue driving with added caution p gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident The display will clear after driving a short distance at more than 12 mph 20 km h Practical hints What to do if Display message Possible cause Possible solution ESP ESP The charging voltage has fallen below ten When the voltage is above this value NOT AVAILABLE volts The ESP has switched off again the ESP is operational again gt If necessary have the generator
95. C 230 Kompressor C 320 Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes Benz Your selection of our product is a demon stration of your trust in our company name Furthermore it exemplifies your de sire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service Your Mercedes Benz represents the ef forts of many skilled engineers and crafts men To help assure your driving pleasure and also the safety of you and your passen gers we ask you to make a small invest ment of time Please read this manual carefully then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference e Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual They are de signed to acquaint you with the opera tion of your Mercedes Benz Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and oc cupants We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe pleasurable driving Mercedes Benz USA LLC A DaimlerChrysler Company Introduction ccccccccccccccceeeeeseeesees 9 Product information cccceeceeeeeeeeee 9 Operator s Manual cccesesseeeeeees 10 Service and warranty information 10 Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes Benz automobiles 11 Maintenance ceeeeseeeeeeeeeees 12 R
96. Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the vehicle break in period i Do not use any special lubricant addi tives as these may damage the drive assemblies Using special additives not approved by Mercedes Benz will restrict your warranty entitlement More information on this subject is available at any Mercedes Benz Center Operation Engine compartment Checking engine oil level with the i control system ENGINE OIL LEVEL y MEASURING NOW If you want to interrupt the checking When checking the oil level the vehicle MEASURE CORRECT procedure press the A or Za must ONLY IF VEH LEVEL button on the multifunction steering Oj e be parked on level ground r2F wheel e be at normal operating temperature One of the following messages will gt If necessary add engine oil e have been stationary for at least five subsequently appear in the indicator adding engine oil see gt page 239 minutes with the engine turned off e ENGINE OIL LEVEL i oe i For more information on engine oil see To check the engine oil level via the 0 Technical data section gt page 330 multifunction display do the following e ADD 1 0 Ot TO gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch REACH MAX OIL LEVEL Other display messages to position 2 Canada 1 0 LITER If the SmartKey is not turned to position 2 The standard display gt page 109 should e ADD 1 5 Qts TO in the starter switch the following appear
97. LANCE RESET P82 60 4085 31 El ET AD Rh gt Regardless of operating mode press EERIE and hold AUD key longer than two seconds RESET will appear on the gt Press Lor R key to shift sound accord ingly to the left or right speakers display All settings for bass treble and balance are returned to the center level and the gt Press both Land Rkeys simultaneously volume is set to a predefined level to reset the Balance to its center level or Audio system sound selection EXT gt Regardless of operating mode press the AUD key The sound settings menu appears on the display gt Press the EXT key SOUND DRIVER DRU SP AMB 0 P82 60 4065 31 gt Press one of the function keys You can select from among the following settings e DRV The tone level is set to the Driver position sound is directed toward the passengers e SP The tone level is set for Speech optimizing the sound for the spoken word e AMB The tone level is set for Ambience producing a three dimensional sound e OFF The audio system sound selection is turned off Telephone muting If a telephone has been installed in the vehicle the radio will switch to telephone mode when a call is incoming The current audio source is muted Radio operation Selecting radio mode gt Press button gt You can now receive radio stations over the analog FM AM or WB station frequencies or you can receive chan
98. Removing front seat head restraints head restraints Tilt the backrest to the rear for easier Pull head restraint to its highest posi removal and installation of the head re tion For more information on head restraint ad straints justment see Adjusting gt page 32 gt Press release button Q and pull out head restraint Warning A For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Front seat head restraints manual seat Installing front seat head restraints gt Insert head restraint and push it down to the stop Adjust head restraint so that the head re straint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an ac cident or similar situation gt Press release button Q and adjust head restraint to desired position Do not drive the vehicle without the seat i head restraints Head restraints are intend Release button ed to help reduce injuries during an acci dent Do not interchange head restraints from front and rear seat Front seat head restraints power seat Removing front seat head restraints gt Press switch Q upwards and hold until the head restraint is fully extended gt Pull out head restraint Installing front seat head restraints gt Press switch Q upwards and hold for about five seconds gt Push the head restraint down until it engages
99. SP immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not When the ESP warning i en the warning lamp EAN is apply anymore illuminated continuously the ESP is switched off Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail ing road conditions and to the non operating status of the ESP Switching on the ESP gt Press lower half 2 of the ESP switch until the ESP warning lamp in the speedometer goes out You are now again in normal driving mode Safety and Security Anti theft systems V Anti theft systems Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons from starting your vehicle Activating e Removing the SmartKey from the start er switch activates the immobilizer Deactivating e Inserting the SmartKey in the starter switch deactivates the immobilizer i In case the engine cannot be started yet the vehicle s battery is charged the system is not operational Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call 1 800 FOR MER Cedes in the USA or 1 800 387 0100 in Canada Anti theft alarm system Once the alarm system has been armed a visual and audible alarm is triggered when someone opens e adoor e the trunk lid e the hood The alarm will stay on even if the activating element a door for example is immedi ately closed The alarm system will also be triggered when e someone attempts to raise the vehicle e the vehicle is opened with the mechan ical key i
100. The receiving symbol in the display disappears Adjusting the volume gt Turn control knob ROJ during tele phone operation The volume increases or decreases de pending on the direction in which the knob is turned bi The volume can be adjusted separately for the telephone voice control sys tem and radio Placing a call Entering a telephone number and starting the dialing process Saal 4 F ACCS LSAT i SND CLR END gt Enter the desired telephone number using buttons EE to EJ The number can have up to 32 digits but only 13 of these are visible on the display If necessary correct number entered with the CLR key gt Press key briefly to delete the last digit entered gt Press key and hold to delete the com plete number gt After correct telephone number has been entered press the SND key Phone book The numbers stored in the phone book can be called up either by name or number Calling up the phone book ACEA DE ACT i A pe ape of CLE P82 60 4077 31 gt Press EN EA EJ or Ka but ton Switching between name search and number search gt Press the ABC key The name search is called up or gt Press the NUM key The number search is called up Searching and calling up phone book en tries by name Mr Saal BROWN SND NUM gt Press the ABC key CLE END P82 60 4078 31 The current name is highlighted on the display
101. Use only belts in stalled or supplied by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center e Airbags and emergency tensioning de vice ETDs are designed to function on a one time only basis An airbag or ETD that was activated must be replaced No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS This includes changing or re moving any component or part of the SRS the installation of additional trim material badges etc over the steering wheel hub front passenger airbag cov er door trim panels or door frame trims and installation of additional elec trical electronic equipment on or near SRS components and wiring Keep area between airbags and occupants free from objects e g packages purses umbrellas etc Do not pass belts over sharp edges They could tear Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the belts Do not hang items such as coat hangers from the coat hooks or handles over the door These items may turn into projec tiles and cause head and other injuries when curtain airbag is deployed An airbag system component within the steering wheel gets hot after the airbag has inflated Do not touch Improper work on the system including incorrect installation and removal can lead to possible injury through an unin tended activation of the SRS In addition through improper work there is a risk of rendering the SRS inop erative or causing unintended airbag d
102. a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your car is cover ing a distance of 50 feet approximately 14 m every second Operating safety Warning VAN Any alterations made to electronic compo nents can cause malfunctions The radio amplifier CD changer satellite radio telephone and voice control sys tem are interconnected When one of the components is not operational or has not been removed replaced properly the func tion of other components may be impaired This condition might seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle We recommend that you have any service work on electronic components carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Controls in detail Audio system Controls in detail Audio system Operating and display elements RADIO F kec Pa 4 5 o MAS 8 PQRS TUV P82 60 4092 31 Item CD mode selector Manual tuning radio Fast forward reverse cassette CD Speed dialing memory telephone Radio mode selector Display panel Cassette compartment behind display panel Page 175 165 174 178 183 165 od Item Alpha numeric keypad Band selection station buttons radio CD selection CD Telephone number entry retrieving speed dialing memory telephone Scanning radio cassette CD Function button Light emitting diode Page 165 177 180 167 174 178 166 0000 Co
103. adio SAT USA only gt page 168 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to sep arate operating instructions Operate the CD player gt Turn on the radio and select the CD player gt page 175 Vehicles with CO MAND Refer to separate operating in structions gt Press button or repeatedly until the settings for the CD currently being played are shown in the display Current track Current CD for CD changer gt Press button R or BaN repeatedly until the desired track is selected To select a CD from the magazine press a number on the audio system or the COMAND system key pad located in the center dashboard Operate the cassette player gt Turn on the radio and select the cas sette player gt page 116 Vehicles with COMAND Refer to separate op erating instructions Press button or repeatedly until the settings for the cassette cur rently being played are shown in the display Current side gt Press button J to fast forward to the next track Press button R to rewind the cas sette to the beginning of the current track i To select the reverse side of the tape press button below track number on the audio system display or enter re quest on the COMAND system locat ed in the center dashboard NAVI menu The NAVI menu contains the functions needed to operate your navigation system gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the mes
104. adlamps 48 High beams 102 Ignition 31 Immobilizer 78 Rear fog lamp 100 Rear window defroster 149 Seat heater 94 Tow away alarm 79 Windshield wipers 49 Adding Coolant 241 Engine oil 239 Additional turn signals 293 Adjustable air outlets Rear passenger compartment 158 Adjusting 32 Air distribution 153 Airvolume 153 Backrest tilt 33 35 Exterior rear view mirror 40 Head restraint height 34 36 91 Head restraint tilt 34 36 Head restraints 92 Instrument cluster illumination 105 Interior rear view mirror 39 Manual seat 33 Mirrors 39 Rear seat head restraints 91 Seat cushion tilt 33 35 Seat fore and aft adjustment Seat height 33 35 Seats 32 Steering column height 38 Steering column length 38 Steering wheel 37 Air conditioner cooling Turning off 156 Turning on 156 Air conditioner refrigerant 332 33 35 Air distribution Adjusting 153 Air outlets Rear passenger compartment Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure 245 Air recirculation mode 154 Activating 154 Deactivating 155 Air volume Adjusting 153 Airbags 57 BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system 67 341 Children 58 Front 61 PASS AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp 67 263 Passenger 61 Safety guidelines 60 Side impact 61 Window curtain 61 Alarm Audible 72 79 158 Canceling 79 Visual 78 Alarm system Anti theft 78 Alignment bolt 303 Alignment bolt vehicle tool kit 341 Anticorrosion antifreeze 337 Antiglare Automatic 146 A
105. an adjust the mirror Adjustment button H 2 Passenger side mirror Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be Driver s side mirror completely removed while in their liquid state by applying plenty of water Make sure the ignition is switched on All the lights in the instrument cluster come on Press button 3 for the left mirror or button for the right mirror Push adjustment button Q up down normally i At low ambient temperatures the mir rors will be heated automatically For more information see Rear view mir left or right according to the setting de rors gt page 146 sired V Driving Warning VAN Do not lay any objects in the driver s foot well Be careful that floor mats or carpets in the driver s footwell have sufficient clear ance for the pedals During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between the pedals You could then no longer brake or accelerate Fastening the seat belt Warning A Always fasten your seat belt before driving off Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained even those sitting in the rear and pregnant women Failure to wear and properly fasten and po sition your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident You and your passengers should always wear seat belts If you are ever in an accident
106. an alternative you may unlock the vehi cle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call the door unlock command Once the vehicle is unlocked a Re sponse Center specialist will attempt to establish voice contact with the ve hicle occupants If the trunk lid recessed handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds be fore door unlock authorization was re ceived by the Response Center you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the trunk lid recessed handle again Controls in detail Useful features Stolen vehicle tracking services In the event your vehicle was stolen gt Report the incident to the police The police will issue a numbered inci dent report gt Pass this number on to the Mercedes Benz Response Center along with your password issued to you when you subscribed to the service The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle s Tele Aid system Once the vehicle is lo cated the Response Center will con tact the local law enforcement and you The vehicle s location will only be pro vided to law enforcement Garage door opener The built in remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled CH devices for example garage door openers a gate openers or other devices compatible with HomeLink or some other systems You can program the signal transmitter i buttons l P68 05 2091 31
107. arch 115 Station selection Setting 128 Steering column Height adjustment 38 Length adjustment 38 Messages in display 282 Steering gear oil Message in display 282 Steering wheel Adjusting 37 Buttons 24 Cleaning 255 Electrical adjustment 38 Height adjustment 38 Manual adjustment 38 Stolen vehicle Tracking services 214 Stopping Sliding pop up roof 191 Windows 187 Storage compartments Armrest 201 Glove box 200 Ventilated compartments 157 Storage spaces Cup holder 201 Storing Memory function Positions into memory 96 Submenus Convenience 129 For settings 111 In control system 113 Instrument cluster 122 Lighting 125 Resetting functions in Control system 120 Selecting 120 Settings menu 119 120 Vehicle 128 Sun visors 148 Supplemental Restraint System SRS 345 Switching Fuel Flexible fuel vehicle 334 Switching off Audio system 162 Automatic central locking control system 129 Delayed exterior lamps 127 Engine 53 ESP 76 Hazard warning flasher 102 Headlamps 53 Seat heating 94 Switching on Audio system 162 Automatic central locking control system 129 ESP 77 Fog lamps 101 Front foglamp 101 Hazard warning flasher 102 Headlamps 48 High beams 102 Rapid seat heating 94 Rear fog lamp 101 Seat heating 94 Windshield wipers 49 Synchronizing ESP 266 Panorama sliding pop up roof and roller sunblinds 193 Power windows 188 T Tachometer 23 107 Overspeed range 107 Tail lamps Cleaning
108. ark this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Warning To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re sult of vehicle movement before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always e Keep right foot on brake pedal e Firmly depress parking brake pedal e Move the gear selector lever to position P manual transmission first or reverse gear e Slowly release brake pedal e When parked on an incline turn front wheels towards road curb e Turn the SmartKey to starter switch position O and remove e Take the SmartKey and lock vehicle when leaving Parking brake Release handle Parking brake gt Step firmly on parking brake 2 When the engine is running the indica tor lamp USA only or Canada only in the instrument cluster will be illuminated A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattend ed in the vehicle or with access to an un locked vehicle Children could release the parking brake and or move the gear selec tor lever from position P either of which could result in an accident and or serious injury Warning AN Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se lector lever not fully engaged in position Pis dangerous Also when parke
109. ay message RESTRAINT SYSTEM DRIVE TO WORKSHOP Warning VAN In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi cated as outlined above the SRS may not be operational For your safety we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may Possible cause The system is malfunctioning The steering column is not properly locked The steering gear oil level is too low There is a danger of steering gear damage not be activated when needed in an accident which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury Possible solution gt Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt Lock steering column gt page 38 gt Have the system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Warning A If the level of steering gear oil in reservoir is too low the steering power assistance could fail Much greater effort will then be needed to turn the steering wheel Do not add steering oil without checking the steering system Do not drive the vehicle Have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Display symbol 5 Practical hints What to do if Display message Possible cause Possible solution One or more main functions of the Tele Have the Tele Aid system checked by Aid sys
110. ay only with vehicle standing still Set the parking brake to se cure vehicle from movement Move gear se lector lever to position N With gear selector lever in position N turn off the engine o o gt Secure vehicle from movement by set Co a ting the parking brake Move the gear Opening ashtray Cigarette lighter selector lever to position N gt Pull at top of cover to open ashtray Cover Now you have more room to take out gt Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to the insert Removing ashtray insert position 1 or 2 gt Slide ashtray insert in direction of gt Press latch to disengage ashtray in Slide cover rearward arrow 2 until it disengages sert and remove it Push in cigarette lighter gt Grip ashtray at indents arrows and k Reinstalling the ashtray insert The cigarette lighter will pop out auto remove insert from ashtray frame f matically when hot gt Install ashtray insert Reinstalling the ashtray insert gt Close the ashtray gt Install insert by pushing back into frame until it engages again A Never touch the heating element or sides of the cigarette lighter they are extremely hot Hold the knob only Warning When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehi cle equipment may cause a
111. bySmart will not however turn off any side impact airbag It should be noted that with respect to both front and rear side impact airbags there is a possibility for a side airbag related injury if occupants especially children are not prop erly seated or restrained when next to a side airbag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job To help avoid the possibility of injury please follow these guidelines 1 Occupants especially children should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door or rear quarter trim panels where the side air bag inflates This could result in serious injuries or death should the side airbag be activated n D Always sit upright properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized in fant or child restraint system for all chil dren 12 years old or under 3 Always wear seat belts properly If you believe that even with the use of these guidelines it would be safer for your rear seat occupants to have both rear side airbags deactivated then deactivation can be accomplished upon your written request to do so at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center at an additional cost Please contact your local authorized Mercedes Benz Center or call our Customer Assistance Center at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 for details i Airbags are designed to activate only in certain frontal impacts front airbags and in side impac
112. c cident Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle even if the children are secured in a child restraint system Unsupervised chil dren in a child restraint system may use ve hicle equipment and may cause an accident and or serious personal injury BabySmart airbag deactivation system PASS AIRBAG OFF Safety and Security Occupant safety Special BabySmart compatible child seats designed for use with the Mercedes Benz system and available at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center are required for use with the BabySmart air bag deactivation system With the special child seat properly installed the passenger front airbag will not deploy The PASS AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lo cated in the center console will be illumi nated except with the SmartKey removed or in starter switch position 0 i The system does not deactivate the side impact airbag and the emergency tensioning device Safety and Security Occupant safety Self test BabySmart without special child seat installed After turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 the PASS AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp located in the center console comes on for approx six seconds and then goes out If the indicator lamp should not come on or is continuously lit the system is not func tioning You must see an authorized Mercedes Benz Center before seating any child on the passenger seat For more information s
113. c transmission 144 Programme type ID see PTY ID PTYID 168 Qa Quick search Phone book 136 R Radio Selecting stations 115 Station search 115 Station selection setting 128 Radio operation 165 Radio see Radio operation Radio transmitters Control and operation 230 Range distance to empty Calling up 134 Rapid seat heating Switching on 94 RDS Programme type ID 168 PTYID 168 Reading lamp 27 Rear bench seat Foldable 197 Rear foglamp 294 Bulb 294 Switching on 101 Rear head restraint tilt 92 Rear lamp bulbs Replacing 298 Rear lamps see Tail lamps Rear passenger compartment Adjustable air outlets 158 Rear seat head restraints 91 93 Adjusting 91 Folding back 92 Installing 93 Placing upright 92 Removing 93 Rear seats Adjusting head restraint height 91 Rear view mirror automatic antiglare 146 Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Rear window defroster 149 Activating 149 Deactivating 149 Reconnecting Vehicle battery 308 Refrigerant Air conditioner 332 Refuelling 233 Regular checks 234 Reinstalling vehicle battery 308 Remote controls SmartKey 82 Remote door unlock With Tele Aid 213 Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 344 Removing Vehicle battery 308 Wheel 303 Wiper blades 300 Replacing Backup lamp bulbs 298 Brake lamp bulbs 298 Bulbs 293 Front lamp bulbs 295 Front turn signal bulbs High beam bulbs 295 High beam bulbs xenon type headlamps 296 License plate lamp bulbs 299 Low beam bulbs 295 Parking lamp bulbs 296
114. cceseceeeeeee 323 C32 Onna 323 ENEN Erein a 324 Rims and Tires eesseessseeseseessesssess 325 Same SIZE TIES eee eeeneeeeeeee 326 Spare wheel csccsesscesssrerensees 326 Electrical system s es 327 Main Dimensions 328 Weights i vcess cs cessevt ss suyeevincusssectecanea cows 329 Fuels coolants lubricants etc 330 Capacities ee eeeeeeseeeeseeeeetene 330 EMBIMG OS 0 isenana 332 Engine oil additives 332 Air conditioning refrigerant 332 Brake fluid eeeeeesseeesneeeeeeeees 332 Premium unleaded gasoline 333 Fuel requirements ssceeeeeeee 333 Gasoline additives eee 334 Flexible Fuel Vehicles 0 334 COOlaNtSwis 8lessisecieaesviienstavecteetacs 336 Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system 338 Consumer information s s s 339 Uniform tire quality grading 339 V Product information Please observe the following in your own best interest We recommend using genuine Mercedes Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model We have tested these parts to determine their reliability safety and special suitabili ty for Mercedes Benz vehicles We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them even if in indi vidual cases an official approval or authori zation by governmental or other agencies should exist Use
115. ce the belt over your shoulder Push latch plate into buckle until it clicks gt If necessary tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up Belt outlet height adjustment Button for belt outlet height adjust ment gt To raise slide belt outlet upward gt To lower press button Q and slide belt outlet downward Getting started Driving Proper use of seat belts e Do not twist the belt when fastening e Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder it should not touch the neck or pass under the arm For this purpose you can adjust the height of the belt outlet e Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips over hip joint and not across the abdomen e Place the seat backrest in a nearly up right position e Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time e Do not fasten a seat belt around a per son and another object at the same time e Check your seat belt during travel to ensure that it is properly positioned Getting started Driving e Ensure that the seat belt is always fit Starting the engine Manual transmission ted snugly You should avoid wearing i bulky clothing such as winter coats when traveling in the vehicle Warning A as A Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to anung your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide and inhalin
116. ck your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion In doing so do not neglect the underbody of the vehicle A prerequisite for a thor ough check is a washing of the underbody followed by a thorough inspection Dam aged areas need to be re undercoated Your vehicle has been treated at the facto ry with a wax base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle Post production treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes Benz because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others ap plied later Operation Vehicle care We have selected car care products and compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology You can obtain Mercedes Benz approved car care products at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Scratches corrosive deposits corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car care products recommended here In such cases it is best to seek aid at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important how to information as well as references to Mercedes Benz approved car care prod ucts Additional information can be found in the
117. cked with the central locking switch A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning The switch is located in the center console Central locking switch Locking Unlocking Locking gt Press upper half of the central lock ing switch If all the doors are closed the vehicle locks Unlocking gt Press lower half 2 of the central lock ing switch The vehicle unlocks You can open a locked door from in side Open door only when conditions are safe to do so If the vehicle was previously centrally locked with the SmartKey it will not un lock using the central locking switch If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch e while in the individual remote con trol mode only the door opened from the inside is unlocked e while in the global remote control mode the complete vehicle is un locked when a door is opened from the inside V Seats For information on seat adjustment see Adjusting gt page 32 Easy entry exit feature With the easy entry exit feature activated the steering wheel tilts upwards and the driver s seat moves to the rear This allows easier entry into an
118. ct to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Controls in detail Useful features Programming or reprogramming the in Step 3 tegrated remote control The indicator lamp flashes the first time the signal transmitter button is programmed If this button has already been programmed the indicator lamp gt Hold the end of the hand held remote control transmitter of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 in 5 to12 cm away from the surface Step 1 gt Switch on ignition Step 2 of the integrated remote control locat will only start flashing after gt If you have previously programmed an ed on the interior rear view mirror 20 seconds integrated signal transmitter button keeping the indicator lamp in view and wish to retain its programming Step 4 Step 5 proceed to step 3 Otherwise press and hold the two outer signal transmit ter buttons 2 and and release them only when the indicator light be gins to flash after approximately gt When the indicator lamp Q flashes rapidly release both buttons Step 6 gt Using both hands simultaneously press the hand held transmitter button and the desired inte
119. ction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C Those grades repre sent the tire s ability to stop on wet pave ment as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance Warning VAN The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Technical data Consumer information Temperature The temperature grades are A the high est B and C representing the tire s resis tance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high tem perature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and ex cessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of perfor mance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law Warning A The temperature grade for this tire is estab lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underin flation or excessive loading either sepa rately or in combination can cause excessive heat build
120. ction of rotation 245 Driving instructions 226 Retreads 244 Rims and tires 325 Service life 245 Temperature 246 Temperature grades 340 Tread depth 247 Wear pattern 246 Winter 247 Tools 285 Tow away alarm 25 79 Arming 79 Disarming 79 Disarming for transport 79 Towing eye bolt vehicle tool kit Installing 316 Towing the vehicle 313 Tracking services For stolen vehicle 214 Traction 144 339 345 Transmission see Automatic transmission 241 Tread depth tires 247 Treadwear 339 Trim panel Opening 318 Trip computer 132 Trip odometer Resetting 107 Trunk Auxiliary fuse box 318 Lighting 104 Opening 85 Trunk lid Closing 86 Emergency release 86 Message in display 283 Turn signal lamps Replacing bulbs 293 294 Turn signals 48 Additional in mirrors 293 Cleaning lenses 253 Front bulbs 293 295 297 Indicator lamps 23 Rear bulbs 294 299 Turning off Engine 53 U Units Setting speedometer units 124 Setting temperature units 123 Unlocking 30 82 Driver s door in an emergency 288 Fuel filler flap 233 Gear selector lever manually 291 Global 83 In an emergency 288 Individual settings 83 Trunk lid in an emergency 289 Vehicle in an emergency 213 With the SmartKey 30 Upgrade signals Tele Aid 212 Uphill driving Cruise control 195 Upholstery Cleaning 256 Upshifting 140 Useful features 200 Ashtrays 203 Cigarette lighter 204 Interior storage spaces 200 Tele Aid 206 Telephone 205 V Vehic
121. ction to select the manual or memory station selection mode for the radio gt page 115 gt Move the selection marker with the or ESM button to the VEHICLE submenu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until you see this message in the dis play PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE The selection marker is on the current setting PRESS BUTTON IH AUDIO MODE STATION SEARCH MEMORY 4 32 2202 31 gt Press or E to select the de sired station selection mode You can select e STATION SEARCH e MEMORY selects next stored station gt Press or E to switch Setting automatic locking Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic central locking With the au tomatic central locking system activated the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h gt Move the selection marker with the or E button to the Vehicle submenu Press button Xj or R repeatedly until you see this message in the dis play AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK The selection marker is on the current setting AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK ON or OFF Controls in detail Control system Convenience submenu Access the CONVENIENCE submenu via the SETTINGS menu Use the CONVENIENCE sub menu to change the settings for a number of convenience features The following functions are available Function Page 130 131 132 Activate easy entry exit feature Set key dep
122. ctor lever in position P to secure the vehicle Effect The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P With the SmartKey removed the gear selector lever is locked in position P If the vehicle s electrical system is malfunctioning the gear selector lever could remain locked in position P gt page 291 Reverse gear Place gear selector lever in position R only when vehicle is stopped Effect Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle When the brakes are released the vehicle can be moved freely pushed or towed To avoid damage to the trans mission never engage N while driving If the ESP is deactivated or malfunctioning Move gear selector lever to N only if the vehicle is in danger of skidding e g on icy roads Drive The transmission shifts automatically All five forward gears are available Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with gear selector lever in N can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Warning A Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is dangerous Also position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P gt page 46 When parked on an i
123. ctory Fuel consumption Load phone ature display tion guidance tion messages settings statistics after book 2 start c Digital speed Operate CD Instrument cluster Fuel consumption Searchforname 2 ometer player submenu statistics since the in phone book last reset Z Call up FSS Operate cas Lighting submenu Call up range sette player E Check engine oil Vehicle submenu level Convenience sub menu Controls in detail Control system i The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the system and are not neces sarily identical to those shown in the control system displays The first function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system you are in Standard display menu You can select the functions in the stan dard display menu with button IRA or E The following functions are available Function Page Call up coolant temperature dis 106 play Call up digital speedometer 114 Call up FSS 249 Check engine oil level 238 Display digital speedometer gt Press button EAN twice The current vehicle speed is shown in the multifunction display AUDIO menu The functions in the AUDIO menu operate the audio equipment which you currently have turned on If no audio equipment is currently turned on the message AUDIO OFF is shown in the display The following functions are available Function Page Select radio statio
124. cy braking situation is over The ABS will prevent the wheels from locking When you release the brake pedal the brakes function again as normal The BAS is then deactivated For more information see BAS gt page 265 Warning VAN The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following an other vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP The Electronic Stability Program ESP monitors the vehicle s traction force of adhesive friction between the tires and the road surface and handling The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spin ning or if the vehicle starts to skid By ap plying brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limiting engine output the ESP works to stabilize the vehicle The ESP is especially useful while driving off and on wet or slip pery road surfaces The ESP warning lamp in the speed ometer flashes when the ESP is engaged The ESP warning lamp in the speed ometer comes on when you turn the SmartKey in the starter s
125. d gt Push or pull on the lower edge of the head restraint cushion Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intend ed to help reduce injuries during an acci dent For more information see Seats gt page 89 Power seat adjustment The seat adjustment switches are located in each door Head restraint height Seat height Seat cushion tilt Seat fore and aft adjustment Backrest tilt gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 gt page 31 or gt Open the driver s or passenger door Seat fore and aft adjustment p gt Press the switch forward or backward in the direction of arrow Adjust seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator brake pedal safely The position should be as far to the rear as possible consistent with ability to properly operate controls i When moving the seat be sure that there are no items in the footwell or be hind the seat Otherwise you could damage the seat The memory function gt page 95 lets you store the settings for the seat position together with the setting for the steering wheel and the exterior rear view mirrors Getting started Adjusting Seat cushion tilt gt Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow until your upper legs are lightly supported Seat backrest tilt gt Press the
126. d each time after the battery has been disconnect ed if the power windows cannot be fully opened Express open or closed Ex press close Synchronizing the power windows gt Switch on ignition gt Pull the power window switches until the side windows are closed Hold the switches for approximately one second The power window are adjusted V Panorama sliding pop up roof A When opening or closing the panorama sliding pop up roof make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the open ing or closing procedure Warning If the panorama sliding pop up roof is closed with the convenience closing feature and becomes blocked it will not open auto matically Should this occur press the button on the SmartKey and hold it down the panorama sliding pop up roof opens again The panorama roof is made out of glass In the event of an accident the glass may shat ter This may result in an opening in the roof In a vehicle rollover occupants not wearing their seat belts or not wearing them properly may be thrown out of the opening Such an opening also presents a potential for injury for occupants wearing their seat belts prop erly as entire body parts or portions of them may protrude from the passenger compart ment Opening and closing the roller sun blinds for the panorama sliding pop up roof The sliding pop up roof and the roller sun blinds can be opened and closed electri
127. d exit from the vehicle when the driver s door is opened However the engine must be turned off When the SmartKey is inserted in the start er switch and the driver s door is closed the steering wheel and the driver s seat re turn to their last set position Warning A You must make sure that no one can be come trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel and driver s seat when the easy entry exit feature is activated the driver s door is being opened and the engine is turned off or the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could open the driver s door and unintentionally activate the easy entry exit feature which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Controls in detail Seats You can activate the following functions e Steering column Only the steering column is adjusted e Steering column and seat The steering column and the seat are adjusted The easy entry exit feature can be switched on or off in the convenience sub menu of the control system gt page 130 i To cancel seat steering wheel move ment do one of the following e Press the seat adjustment switch gt page 35 e Move the steering column stalk gt page 38 e Press the memory button gt page 96 Controls in detail Seats Removing and installing front seat i
128. d on an incline position P alone may not prevent your vehi cle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Warning Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P manual transmission first or reverse gear When parked on an incline turn front wheels towards the road curb Switching off headlamps gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to I gt page 48 For more information on headlamps see Lighting gt page 98 Getting started Parking and locking Turning off the engine gt Place the gear selector lever in position P manual transmission first or reverse gear i Always set the parking brake in addi tion to shifting to position P manual transmission first or reverse gear On steep slopes turn the front wheels towards the road curb Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 and remove it The immobilizer is activated i Vehicles with automatic transmission The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P Press the seat belt release button gt page 41 gt D gt D Getting started Parking and locking Allow the retractor to completely re wind the seat belt by guiding the latch plate With the SmartKey removed and the driver s door open a warning sounds if the vehicle s exterior lamps are not switched off Warning A To prevent possible personal injur
129. d roads the braking efficien cy should be tested as soon as possible af ter driving is resumed A Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking ma neuvers Warning A If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow make sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with the engine running Otherwise deadly carbon monox ide CO gases may enter vehicle interior re sulting in unconsciousness and death Warning To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation open a window slightly on the side of the ve hicle not facing the wind A The outside temperature indicator is not de signed to serve as an ice warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose In dicated temperatures just above the freez ing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice Warning For more information on winter driving see Winter driving gt page 247 Operation Driving instructions Standing water Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth Before driving through water determine its depth Never accelerate before driving into water The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equip ment thus damaging them If you must drive through standing wa ter drive slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment Water in these areas could cause damage to electrical comp
130. damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty or result in property damage or personal injury Warning VAN No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative Contact your nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center j Turning the SmartKey in starter switch to position 2 causes all lamps as well as the multifunction display to come on Ensure that they are all in working order before starting your journey On the pages that follow you will find a compilation of the most important warning and malfunction messages that may ap pear in the display High priority messages appear on a red background Text messages Display message BAS BRAKE ASSIST NOT AVAILABLE BRAKE ASSIST VISIT WORKSHOP DISPLAY MALFUNCTION VISIT WORKSHOP Practical hints What to do if Possible cause Possible solution The charging voltage has fallen below ten When the voltage is above this value volts The BAS has switched off again the BAS is operational again gt If necessary have the generator and battery checked The BAS has detected a malfunction and gt Continue driving with added caution switched off The brake system is still functioning normally but without the BAS available Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident The
131. desired po sition gt To lock the steering column push handle all the way in until it engag es The steering wheel is once again locked into position Do not drive the vehicle until you have properly locked the steering column If the warning message STEERING WHEEL ADJ LOCK gt page 282 is displayed while the engine is running the steering column is not locked Steering wheel adjustment electrical The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is located on the steering column lower left Adjusting steering column in or out Adjusting steering column up or down gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 gt page 31 or gt Open the drivers door Adjusting steering column in or out gt Move stalk forward or back in the direc tion of arrow until a comfortable steering wheel position is reached with your arms slightly bent at the elbow Adjusting steering column up or down gt Move stalk up or down in the direction of arrow 2 Make sure your legs can move freely and that all the displays incl malfunc tion and indicator lamps on the instru ment cluster are clearly visible i The memory function gt page 95 lets you store the setting for the steering wheel together with the setting for the seat position and exterior rear view mirrors Mirrors Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mirrors before driving so that you have a g
132. device and only use the telephone when road weather and traffic conditions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle Only operate the COMAND Cockpit Man agement and Data System if road weather and traffic conditions permit Observe all legal requirements gt D gt D Controls in detail Useful features Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of approx 44 feet ap proximately 13 5 m every second You can take and place telephone calls us ing the and buttons on the steering wheel To carry out other tele phone functions use the control system gt page 134 See separate operating manual for instruc tions on how to use the telephone A Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a ve hicle Whether or not prohibited by law for safety reasons the driver should not use the cellular telephone while the vehicle is in mo tion Warning Stop the vehicle in a safe location before an swering or placing a call Tele Aid The initial activation of the Tele Aid sys tem may only be performed by com pleting the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the SOS button Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated If the system is not activated the indicator lamp
133. dow curtain airbags 61 Windows see Side windows Windshield Defogging 153 Refilling washer fluid 243 Replacing wiper blades 300 Washer fluid 243 338 Washer system 338 Windshield washer fluid 338 Message in display 283 Mixing ratio 338 Refilling 243 Wiping with 50 Windshield washer system 338 Windshield wipers 49 Fast wiper speed 49 Replacing wiper blades 300 Single wipe 50 Switchingon 49 Wiping with windshield washer fluid 50 Winter driving 247 Block heater 248 Snow chains 248 Tires 247 Transmission program mode 144 Winter driving instructions 228 Winter tires 247 Wiper blades Cleaning 254 Installing 300 Removing 300 Replacing 300 Wiping And washing simultaneously 50 Interval 49 With windshield washer fluid 50 Wood trims Cleaning 256 X Xenon headlamps Bi Xenon 341 Service and Literature Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes Benz parts to service your vehicle properly For expert advice and quality service see your authorized Mercedes Benz Center If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle please contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Center We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle For further information you can find us on the Mercedes Benz web site www mbusa com or www mercedes benz ca Warning VAN To help avoid personal injury be extremely careful when performing any serv
134. down before removing cap The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure Using a rag slowly open the cap approx imately 1 2 turn to relieve excess pres sure If opened immediately scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out un der pressure Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts Antifreeze contains ethylene gly col which may ignite and burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts Operation Engine compartment Coolant expansion tank gt Using a rag turn the cap slowly approx imately one half turn to the left to re lease any excess pressure gt Continue turning the cap to the left and remove it The coolant level is correct if the level e for cold coolant reaches the black top part of the reservoir e for warm coolant is approx 0 6 in 1 5 cm higher Add coolant as required Replace and tighten cap Operation Engine compartment Battery Your vehicle s battery is located in the en gine compartment on the right hand side The battery should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve its rated ser vice life Refer to Service Booklet for bat tery maintenance intervals If you use your vehicle mostly for short distance trips you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequent ly When replacing the battery always use batteries approved by Mercedes Benz If you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended p
135. e Practi cal hints gt page 275 Operation Engine compartment Adding engine oil Only use approved engine oils For a listing of approved engine oils refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet in your vehicle literature port folio In addition check the oil filler cap for important information pertaining to the engine oil needing to meet a specific Mercedes Benz specification e g MB 229 5 If such information is printed on the oil filler cap only use an engine oil from the list of approved engine oils in the Factory Approved Service Prod ucts pamphlet that meets the specifi cation indicated on the oil filler cap Using engine oils of other specification may cause the FSS to incorrectly deter mine the next service interval and will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Operation Engine compartment Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty gt Screw oil filler cap back on filler neck C 230 Kompressor Oil filler cap gt Unscrew oil filler cap from filler neck gt Add engine oil as required Be careful not to overfill with oil Be careful not to spill any oil when adding Avoid environmental damage caused by oil entering the ground or water C 320 Oil filler cap gt Unscrew oil filler cap from fil
136. e ployment Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians Contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Center For your protection and the protection of others when scrapping the airbag unit or emergency tensioning device our safety instructions must be fol lowed These instructions are available from your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Given the considerable deployment speed and the textile structure of the airbags there is the possibility of abra sions or other injuries resulting from air bag deployment When you sell your vehicle we strongly urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an SRS by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator s Manual Front airbags Driver and passenger airbags are de ployed e inthe event of a frontal impact e ifimpact exceeds a preset deployment threshold e independently of the side impact air bags The airbags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system s deploy ment thresholds You will then be protect ed by the fastened seat belts The front passenger airbag will only be de ployed if e the front passenger seat is occupied e the PASS AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp in the center console is not lit gt page 67 e the impact exceeds a preset deploy ment threshold Driver airbag Passenger airbag Safety and Security Occupant safety Do not place objects heavier than
137. e 100 Setting 125 126 Deactivating Air conditioning cooling 156 Air recirculation mode 155 Alarm 79 Anti theft alarm system 79 Central locking control system 129 Climate control 151 Cruise control 195 Defrost 154 ESP 76 Exteriorlamps 99 Exterior lamps delayed shut off 127 Front fog lamps 127 Hazard warning flasher 102 Headlamps 53 Immobilizer 78 Interior lighting delayed shut off 128 Rear window defroster 149 Seat heater 94 Tow away alarm 80 Deep water see Standing water 229 Defogging Windshield 153 Defrosting 154 Delayed shut off Exterior lamps 127 Interior lighting 128 Dialing Anumber telephone 136 Difficulties While driving see Problems while driving 50 With starting 46 Digital speedometer 114 Direction of rotation tires 245 Discharged battery Jump starting 310 Disconnecting Vehicle battery 308 Display Selecting 125 Display elements Audio system 160 Displays Digital speedometer 114 Messages 238 264 Selecting 125 Service indicator 249 Showing malfunctions 118 Symbol messages 268 Text messages 265 Distance to empty range Calling up 132 Door control panel 28 Door handle 28 Door unlock With Tele Aid 213 Doors Message in display 274 Opening from inside vehicle 85 Opening from outside 83 Downhill driving Cruise control 195 Downshifting 138 140 Drink holder see Cup holder 201 Drinking and driving 223 Driving Aquaplaning 227 General instructions 41 223 Inwinter 228 Problems 50 Safety sy
138. e 290 Fuel filler flap ossee 291 Manually unlocking the gear selector lever 291 Opening closing in an emergency 292 Panorama sliding pop up roof 292 Replacing bulbs 0 eee 293 Bulbs rodeo atsavesssccerevsce ta ieteecs 293 Replacing bulbs for front lamps 295 Side marker lamp bulb 298 Replacing bulbs for rear lamps 298 Replacing wiper blades eseee 300 REMOVING wrcsccsesscssscisscdeenrescteeeses 300 stalling v 22 2 cccedosvecveevenseebecvseness 300 Flat trenean A cores EE 301 Preparing the vehicle 045 301 Mounting the spare wheel 301 Batte yese ey iesenii era 307 Disconnecting the battery 308 Removing the batteries 308 Charging and reinstalling batteries waive eesriie 308 Reconnecting the batteries 308 J mp St rting seccescissesseiesiecensccsiesseeeetd 310 Towing the vehicle eee 313 Installing towing eye bolt 316 EEE E 317 Fuse box in passenger compartment 317 Fuse box in engine compartment 317 Auxiliary fuse box in trunk 318 Technical data c ccceeeseees 319 Spare parts Service cecsseceeeeeseeees 320 Warranty COVErage eee eeeeeeeeees 321 Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet c0 321 Identification labels eee eeeeeeeeeees 322 Layout of poly V belt drive 323 C 230 KOMpressor
139. e BAS ABS and ESP driving systems see Driving safety sys tems gt page 73 Cruise control Cruise control automatically maintains the speed you set for your vehicle Use of cruise control is recommended for driving at a constant speed for extended periods of time You can set or resume cruise control at any speed over 20 mph 30 km h The cruise control function is operated by means of the cruise control lever The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever found on the left hand side of the steering column A Cruise control is a convenience system de signed to assist the driver during vehicle op eration The driver is and must remain at all times responsible for the vehicle speed and for safe brake operation Warning Only use cruise control if the road the traffic and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed e The use of cruise control can be danger ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed e The use of cruise control can be danger ous on slippery roads Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control e Deactivate cruise control when driving in fog The Resume function should only be oper ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ ously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed Set current or higher speed Set current or lower s
140. e jack on firm ground Position jack Q under the take up bracket so that it is always vertical plumb line as seen from the side even if the vehicle is parked on an in cline Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a maximum of 1 2 in 3 cm from the ground Never start engine while vehi cle is raised Practical hints Flat tire Removing the wheel Mounting the new wheel Warning A Make sure to use original length wheel bolts when remounting the original wheel after it has been repaired gt Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub gt Guide the spare wheel onto the align P40 10 2729 31 P40 10 3165 31 K ment bolt and push it on Alignment bolt C Wheel bolt for light alloy rims Wheel bolt for light alloy spare wheel gt Insert wheel bolts and tighten them gt a upper most wheel bolt and re rimsa d 1B x15 H2 slightly F A gt Inflate the spare tire using the electric gt Replace this wheel bolt with the align m pump gt page 304 ment bolt Q supplied in the tool kit Wheel bolts must be used when Remove the remaining bolts mounting spare wheel rim 7 j size 4 B x 15 H2 gt page 326 Warning A n tpl heel bolts i dor dirt The use of any wheel bolts other than Inflate spare wheel with collapsible tire only E E alae wheel bolts for spare wheel rim after the wheel is properly mounted This could result in damage to the bolt size 4 B x15 H2 can cause physical and wheel hub
141. e steering wheel lock in the straight ahead position and set the parking brake Move the gear selector lever to P man ual transmission to 1st or reverse gear Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway Mounting the spare wheel A The dimensions of the spare wheel are dif ferent from those of the road wheels As a result the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a spare wheel mounted Adapt your driving style accord ingly The spare wheel is for temporary use only When driving with spare wheel mounted en sure proper tire pressure and do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph 80 km h Warning Drive to the nearest Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible to have the spare wheel replaced with a regular road wheel Never operate the vehicle with more than one spare wheel mounted Practical hints Flat tire Preparing the vehicle Prepare the vehicle as described under Preparing the vehicle on this page gt Take the wheel wrench and the jack out of wheel well below the trunk floor gt page 285 gt Take the spare wheel out of the trunk gt page 285 Lifting the vehicle gt Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking wheels with wheel chocks not included or other sizable objects When changing wheel on a level surface gt Place one chock in front of and one be hind the wheel that is diagonally oppo site to the wheel bei
142. e the right to make changes in design and equipment Therefore infor mation illustrations and descriptions in this Operator s Manual might differ from your vehicle Optional equipment is also described in this manual including operating instruc tions wherever necessary Since they are special order items the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator s Manual your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures The Operator s Manual and Service Book let are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle Service and warranty information The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your Mercedes Benz including e New Car Limited Warranty e Emission System Warranty e Emission Performance Warranty e California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont only e State Warranty Enforcement Laws Lemon Laws Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes Benz automobiles Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price if Mercedes Benz USA LLC and or its au thorized repai
143. e very little gas Have the problem repaired by an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible The coolant temperature is over 248 F 120 C The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling the engine gt Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and turn off the engine Allow engine and coolant to cool gt Check the coolant level and add cool ant if necessary gt page 241 Getting started In case of accident If the vehicle is leaking gasoline gt Do not start the engine under any cir cumstances gt Notify local fire and or police authori ties If the extent of the damage cannot be de termined gt Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If no damage can be determined on the e major assemblies fuel system e engine mount gt Start the engine in the usual manner Getting started Parking and locking Y Parking and locking You have now completed your first drive You have properly stopped and parked your vehicle End your drive as follows AN Wait until the vehicle is stationary before re moving the SmartKey from the starter switch The vehicle cannot be steered when the SmartKey is removed Warning AN With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering system In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve hicle Warning A Do not p
144. ead battery al ways remove the SmartKey from the starter switch when the engine is not in operation Getting started Adjusting V Adjusting Warning A All seat head restraint steering wheel and rear view mirror adjustments as well as fas tening of seat belts must be done before the vehicle is put into motion Seats The seats can be adjusted either manually or electrically depending on the vehicle s equipment Warning N Do not adjust the driver s seat while driving Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat back reclined Sitting in an excessively re clined position can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck That could cause serious or fatal injuries The seat back and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in an up right position and belts are properly posi tioned on the body Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt gt page 41 Never place hands under the seat or near any moving parts while a seat is being ad justed Warning VAN When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch and lock your vehicle The power seats can also be operated with the driver s or passenger door open Do not leave children unattended in
145. ed You can temporarily deactivate the de layed shut off feature gt Before leaving the vehicle turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 gt Then turn it to position 2 and back to 0 The delayed shut off feature is deacti vated It will reactivate as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in the starter switch 127 Controls in detail Control system Interior lighting delayed shut off Use this function to set whether and for how long you would like the interior light ing to remain lit during darkness after the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch gt Move the selection marker with the or E button to the LIGHT ING submenu gt Press button EAN or RA repeatedly until you see this message in the dis play INT LIGHTING DELAYED SHUT OFF The selection marker is on the current setting INT LIGHTING DELAYED SHUT OFF nie bee fs Avy Wy 26 s Ja N iy iy Press or E to select the de sired lamp on time period You can se lect e 0 s the delayed shut off feature is deactivated e 5s 10s 15 sor20 s the delayed shut off feature is activated Vehicle submenu Access the VEHICLE submenu via the SETTINGS menu Use the VEHICLE submenu to make general vehicle settings The following functions are available Function Page Set station selection mode 128 radio Set automatic locking 129 Setting station selection mode Use the PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE fun
146. edal Power window switches Steering wheel adjustment stalk electrical Parking brake release Door control panel Exterior lamp switch Exterior mirror adjustment Page 200 25 31 38 236 46 186 38 46 28 48 98 40 At a glance Cockpit At a glance Instrument cluster VY Instrument cluster P54 30 7565 31 At a glance Instrument cluster Item Page Item Page Item Page Reset button for Speedometer with Multifunction display e Resetting trip odome 107 EE Left turn signal indi with ter cator lamp Trip odometer 107 e Instrument cluster illu 105 HEM Right turn signal in Main odometer mination dicator lamp Outside temperature dis 107 e Resetting individual 119 Electronic Stability 261 play settings Program ESP Digital clock 122 th warning lam Tachometer with i ue Display for program mode 142 Ega Engine malfunction 260 EJ Hish ecim head 102 and gear selector lever 144 indicator lamp lamp indicator position Antilock Brake Sys 258 Indicator lamp i Fuel gauge with tem ABS malfunc o Tn Fuel reserve warning lamp 262 tion warning lamp DTR Indicator lamp ean aD URGE EuTctiont J Seat belt non usage Brake warning 259 ee eon warning lamp lamp except Cana da Ea Supplemental re 262 3 straint system indi Brake warning 259 cator lamp lamp Canada only 1 The indicator lamp illuminates briefly when you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 At a glance Mult
147. ee Practical hints section gt page 262 1 BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp Warning VAN The BabySmart airbag deactivation sys tem will ONLY work with a special child seat designed to operate with it It will not work with child seats which are not BabySmart compatible Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat e g pillow since it reduces the effectiveness of the deactivation sys tem The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident instead of protecting the child Follow the manufacturer s instructions for installation of special child seats Warning VAN When using a BabySmart compatible child seat on the front passenger seat the passenger front airbag will not deploy only if the PASS AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp re mains illuminated Please be sure to check the indicator every time you use the special system child seat Should the light go out while the restraint is installed please check installation If the light remains out do not use the BabySmart restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired Warning A Do not place powered on laptops cell phones and like electronic devices on the front passenger seat Signals from such de vices may interfere with the BabySmart sys
148. eject button E gt The magazine will be ejected Controls in detail Audio system a Selecting CDs CDs which have been inserted improp erly or are unreadable will not be played gt Push magazine into CD changer in di rection of arrow and close sliding door P82 60 4067 31 gt You can select from among the CDs in i Playing CDs the CD magazine using buttons EEN CD gt Press button to EN CD changer CD and the magazine slot number of the CD will appear on the display CD tray selected CD appear on the display The CD magazine The last CD listened to will then start play number of the current track is dis R dull CD full ing at the point where it was switched off played after TRACK gt Remove magazine and pull CD tray fully after the last track on a CD has finished ous the next CD is automatically played CD 2 gt Place CD in recess of tray label side J Ae ee Po E up j a i L E mt gt Push tray into magazine in direction of RDM PPT AUC T arrow P82 60 4068 31 If there is no CD in the selected maga zine slot NO CD appears on the display with the corresponding slot number 177 Controls in detail Audio system Skipping tracks forward backward e Skipping tracks forward gt Press IXE button The next track will be played e Skipping tracks backward gt Press Rf button If the track has been playing for more than ten seconds it will re vert to
149. el gt Press the cover down and secure with clamps Auxiliary fuse box in trunk The auxiliary fuse box is located in the trunk behind the left hand trim panel Auxiliary fuse box Fuse extractor The fuse extractor is found in the cover of the auxiliary fuse box Trim panel Handles Technical data Spare parts service Warranty coverage Identification labels Layout of poly V belt drive Engine Rims and Tires Electrical system Main Dimensions Weights Fuels coolants lubricants etc Consumer information Technical data Spare parts service The Technical data section provides the necessary technical data for your vehicle YV Spare parts service All authorized Mercedes Benz Centers maintain a stock of genuine Mercedes Benz parts required for mainte nance and repair work In addition strate gically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service More than 300 000 different spare parts for Mercedes Benz models are available Genuine Mercedes Benz parts are subject to stringent quality inspections Each part has been specifically developed manufac tured or selected for and adapted to Mer cedes Benz vehicles Therefore genuine Mercedes Benz parts should be installed The use of non genuine Mercedes Benz parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes Benz could damage the vehicle which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Lim
150. em checked otherwise the SRS may Warning Possible cause The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark The warning lamp reminds you to fasten seat belts There is a malfunction in the restraint sys tems The airbags or emergency tensioning device ETDs could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident not be activated when needed in an accident which could result in serious or fatal injury or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could result in an accident and or injury to you or to others Suggested solution gt gt Refuel at the next gas station gt page 233 Fasten your seat belt Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Practical hints What to do if Lamp in center console Problem Possible cause Suggested solution PASS AIRBAG OFF The indicator lamp comes A BabySmart child seat is installed on on the front passenger seat Therefore the passenger front airbag is switched off The system is malfunctioning when there Have the system checked as soon as is no BabySmart child seat installed on possible by an authorized the front passenger seat Mercedes Benz Center The indicator lamp does The system is malfunctioning gt make sure there is nothing between not come on with a seat cushion and child seat and check BabySmart child seat installation of the child seat properly installed on the gt If the lig
151. ement and data system COMAND 342 Collapsible tire 342 COMAND 342 COMAND see separate operating instruc tions Combination switch 102 High beam flasher 102 Turn signals 48 Windshield wipers 49 Consumer information 339 Control and operation of radio transmitters 230 Control system 109 342 190 292 AUDIO menu 114 Convenience submenu 129 Display digitalspeedometer 114 Functions 110 113 Instrument cluster submenu 122 Lighting submenu 125 Malfunction memory menu 117 Menus 112 113 343 Multifunction display 109 Multifunction steering wheel 110 NAV menu 117 Selecting radio system 115 Settings menu 118 Standard display menu 114 Submenus 111 113 TEL menu 134 Trip computer menu 132 Vehicle submenu 128 Convenience submenu 129 Activating easy entry exit feature 130 Setting key dependency 131 Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror 132 Coolant 241 336 Adding 241 Anticorrosion antifreeze quantity 336 Capacities 330 Checking level 241 Messages in display 271 272 Temperature 232 Temperature indicator 106 Warning lamp 272 Coolant level Checking 235 241 Cruise control 194 342 Canceling 195 Driving downhill 195 Driving uphill 195 Fine adjustment 196 Message in display 274 Saving current speed 195 Setting speeds 196 Cruise control lever 194 Cruising range fuel 335 Cup holder Cleaning 255 In front seat armrest 201 Customer Assistance Center CAC 341 D Daytime running lamp mod
152. emory switch gt page 96 gt Move the selection marker with the or EM button to the CONVE NIENCE submenu Press button Xj or R repeatedly until you see this message in the display EASY ENTRY FEATURE ACTI VATE The selection marker is on the current setting EAS Y ENTRY FEATURE S E ACTIVATE OFF STEERING COLUMN STEERING COLUMN SEAT P54 32 2204 31 Press or E to change the easy entry exit setting The following settings are available for the easy entry exit feature OFF The easy entry exit feature is deactivated Only the steering column is moved Both the steering column and the seat are moved STEERING COLUMN STEERING COLUMN SEAT Controls in detail Control system Setting key dependency Use this function to set whether the mem ory settings for the seats the steering wheel and the mirrors should be stored separately for each SmartKey gt page 95 gt Move the selection marker with the or E button to the CONVE NIENCE submenu Press button BaN or R repeatedly until you see this message in the dis play SETTINGS KEY DEPENDENT The selection marker is on the current setting SETTINGS KEY DEPENDENT Press or E to set key dependency to ON or OFF Controls in detail Control system Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror Use the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING function to select whether the passen ger side ext
153. endency Set parking position for exterior rear view mirror Controls in detail Control system Activating easy entry exit feature Use this function to activate and deacti vate the easy entry exit feature When the feature is activated the steering wheel and driver s seat will move back to facilitate ex iting when you e remove the SmartKey from the starter switch e open the driver s door However the engine must be turned off Warning A You must make sure that no one can be come trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel and the driver s seat when the easy entry exit feature is activated and the driver s door is being opened or the SmartKey is removed from the starter switch Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could open the driver s door and unintentionally activate the easy entry exit feature which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury After entering the vehicle the steering wheel and seat will move into the position stored in memory when e the driver s door is closed e you put the SmartKey in the starter switch and e press the appropriate stored position button on the memory switch gt page 96 i To cancel seat steering wheel move ment do one of the following e Press the seat adjustment switch gt page 35 e Move the steering column stalk gt page 38 e Press the m
154. epeatedly until you see this message in the dis play RANGE In the display you will see the calculat ed range based on the current fuel tank level RANGE S12 mi 72 F 10 30a Warning VAN A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we rec ommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a tele phone call If you choose to use the tele phone while driving please use the hands free device and only use the tele phone when weather road and traffic condi tions permit Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a ve hicle Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of approximately 44 feet approximately 13 5 m every sec ond out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system pos sibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury You can use the functions in the TEL menu to operate your telephone provided it is connected to a hands free system and switched on gt Switch on the telephone and COMAND gt Press button or on the steering wheel repeatedly until you see the TEL menu in the display Which messages will appear in the display field depends on
155. eri ously impair the operating safety of your vehicle See your authorized Mercedes Benz Center for repairs or modifications to electronic components Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle Some safety systems only function while the engine is running You should therefore nev er turn off the engine while driving Warning A Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or tires wheels for example when running over an obstacle road debris or a pothole may cause serious damage and impair the operating safety of your vehicle If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride distur bance or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occured you should turn on your hazard warning flashers carefully slow down and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires wheels for possible damage If the ve hicle appears unsafe have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center or other qualified maintenance or repair fa cility for further inspection or repairs Proper use of the vehicle Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are familiar with the following information and rules e the safety precautions in this manual e the Technical data section in this manual e traffic rules and regulations e motor vehicle laws and safety stan dards Warning V
156. eriod of time consult an authorized Mercedes Benz Center about steps you need to observe gt 2 gt p Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries Risk of explosion Keep flames or sparks away from battery Do not smoke Battery acid is caustic Do not allow it to come into contact with skin eyes or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with clear water and seek medical help if necessary Wear eye protection Keep children away Follow the instructions in this Operator s Manual 08 Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system Fluid for the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir It has a capacity of e Vehicles without headlamp cleaning system approx 3 2 US qt 3 I e Vehicles with headlamp cleaning sys tem approx 6 4 US qt 6 I During all seasons add MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S to water Premix the windshield washer fluid in a suitable container gt Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water or commercially available premixed wind shield washer solvent antifreeze de pending on amb
157. erior rear view mirror should be turned downward during parking maneu vers when reverse gear is engaged For ad ditional information see Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position gt page 147 You can store a parking position for the passenger exterior rear view mirror using the memory switch gt page 97 Move the selection marker with the or EBM button to the CONVE NIENCE submenu Press button EAN or R repeatedly until you see this message in the dis play MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING The selection marker is on the current setting MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING P54 32 2206 31 Press or E to switch function ON or OFF Trip computer menu Use the trip computer menu to call up sta tistical data on your vehicle The following information is available Function Page Fuel consumption statistics after 133 start Fuel consumption statistics 133 since last reset Call up range distance to empty 134 Fuel consumption statistics after start gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the first function of the Trip computer menu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until you see this message in the dis play AFTER START AFTER START B BATS mi 1 30 h s Meh 21 4 Mea N OsRer 10 30a TQ PD4 32 2411 31 Distance driven since start Time elapsed since start Average speed since start Average fuel consumption since start Fuel consumption since last res
158. ert bulb socket in lamp and turn to the right Practical hints Replacing bulbs Parking and standing lamp bulb gt gt gt v v v V Switch off the lights Open the hood gt page 236 Turn headlamp cover 2 to the left and remove Pull out the bulb socket with the bulb Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket Insert a new bulb in the socket Reinstall the bulb socket Install cover and turn to the right until it engages Practical hints Replacing bulbs Side marker lamp bulb Replacing bulbs for rear lamps Tail lamp assemblies v Press together the latches Q gt Switch off the lights Remove bulb holder gt Carefully slide lamp towards rear gt Switchioff the lights eile neues An turn ies gt Open the trunk lid gt page 85 gt Insert new bulb and reinstall sii gt Twist bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out gt Turn handles socket gt Pull bulb out of the bulb socket gt Remove the trim panel Q gt Reinstall trim panel Insert new bulb in socket v Reinstall bulb socket push in and twist clockwise v To reinstall lamp set rear end in bumper and let front end snap into place P82 10 3106 31 Stop lamp Back up lamp Turn signal lamp Tail parking standing and rear fog lamp driver s side Practical hints Replacing bulbs License plate lamp P54 35 2031 31 Screws gt Switch off the lights
159. es pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air en ters the passenger compartment through the air distribution system The air conditioning will not engage no cooling if the ACO mode is selected gt page 156 Warning VAN Follow the recommended settings for heat ing and cooling given on the following pag es Otherwise the windows could fog up impairing visibility and endangering you and others i Severe conditions e g strong air pollu tion may require replacement of the fil ter before its scheduled interval A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior If the vehicle interior is hot ventilate the interior before driving off Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris Setting the temperature Use temperature controls 2 and to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments preferably starting at 72 F 22 C a ab When operating the climate control system in automatic mode you will only rarely need to adjust the tempera ture air volume and air distribution Increasing gt Turn the temperature control 2 or slightly to the right The climate control system will corre spondingly adjust the interior air tem perature Decreasing gt Turn the temperature control 2 or slight
160. ess button EAN or eg repeatedly until the desired name appears in the display gt Press button K The control system dials the selected phone number Vv Manual transmission For information on driving with a manual transmission see Manual transmission gt page 137 Do not exceed the maximum speed in the individual gears Refer to tachometer gt page 22 for engine speeds Warning VAN On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi cle control Your vehicle s ABS will not pre vent this type of loss of control Warning A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattend ed in the vehicle or with access to an un locked vehicle Children could move the gearshift lever which could result in an acci dent and or serious injury Controls in detail Manual transmission Warning A For vehicles equipped with a manual trans mission getting out of your vehicle with the gearshift lever not engaged in 1st or reverse gear and parking brake engaged is danger ous Also when parked on an incline an en gaged ist or reverse gear alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving possibly hitting people or objects Always set the parking brake in addition to engaging 1st or reverse gear gt page 52 When parked on an incline tu
161. et gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the first function of the Trip computer menu gt Press button EAN or Bed repeatedly until you see this message in the dis play After RESET AFTER RESET H BP S58 mi 15 66 h 58 Meh 21 4 Mea IN 4 g O 72 F 10 30a P54 32 2412 31 Distance driven since last reset Time elapsed since last reset Average speed since last reset Average fuel consumption since last re set Controls in detail Control system i All statistics stored since the last en gine start will be reset approximately four hours after the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position O or removed from the starter switch Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 with in this time period Resetting fuel consumption statistics gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the first function of the Trip computer menu Press button BaN or R repeatedly until you see the reading that you want to reset in the display Press and hold the reset button in the instrument cluster gt page 22 until the value is reset to 0 Controls in detail Control system Call up range distance to empty gt Press button or repeatedly TEL menu Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with until you see the first function of the Trip computer menu Press button Jj or R r
162. eviously stored driving position e ten seconds after you put the gear selector lever out of position R e immediately once you exceed a ve hicle speed of approx 6 mph 10 km h e immediately when you press button Q for driver s side mirror 147 Controls in detail Good visibility Headlamp cleaning system The switch is located on the left side of the dashboard Headlamp washer switch gt Switch on ignition gt Press switch 1 The headlamps are cleaned with a high pressure water jet For information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 243 Sun visors The sun visors protect you from sun glare while driving A Do not use the vanity mirror while driving Warning Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed while vehicle is in motion Reflected glare can endanger you and others gt Swing sun visors down when you expe rience glare Mounting Mirror cover Mirror lamp Sun visor gt To use mirror lift up cover 2 i If sunlight enters through a side win dow disengage sun visor from mounting Q and pivot to the side The mirror lamp 3 will switch off Rear window defroster The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power To keep the battery drain to a minimum switch off the defrost er as soon as the rear window is clear The defroster is automatically deacti
163. eze protection 35 F 37 C 3 0 US qt 2 8 I 3 4 US qt 3 2 I 49 F 45 C 3 3 US qt 3 1 1 3 8 US qt 3 6 I Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Before the start of the winter season or once a year in hot southern regions you should have the anticorrosion antifreeze concentration checked The coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to your authorized Mercedes Benz Center for service Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system Both the windshield and headlamp washer systems are supplied from the windshield washer fluid reservoir The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of approx e 6 4 US qt 6 0 I in vehicles with head lamp cleaning system e 3 2 US qt 3 0 I in vehicles without headlamp cleaning system gt Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield Washer Concentrate and water or con centrate and commercially available premixed windshield washer sol vent antifreeze depending on ambient temperatures A Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flamma ble Do not spill washer solvent antifreeze on hot engine parts because it may ignite and burn You can be seriously burned Warning Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio For temperatures above freezing point use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and water e 1 part S to 100 parts water 40 ml S
164. f Ethanol fumes and skin contact with Ethanol Extin guish all open flames before refueling Never smoke or create sparks close to Ethanol Warning The fuel filler flap is located on the right hand side of the vehicle towards the rear Locking unlocking the vehicle with the remote control automatically locks unlocks the fuel filler flap gt Turn off the engine Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch gt Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at the point indicated by the arrow The fuel filler flap springs open gt Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on to it until possible pressure is released Operation At the gas station gt Take off the cap and set it in the recess on the fuel filler flap To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air fully insert filler nozzle unit Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out do not top up or overfill A Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres sure in the system which could cause a gas discharge This could cause the gas to spray back out when removing the fuel pump noz zle which could cause personal injury Warning gt Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the right You should hear the fuel cap engage gt Close the fuel filler flap gt D gt D Operation At the gas station Use only premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 average of 96 RON 86 MON Informati
165. f you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Mercedes Benz USA LLC If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Mercedes Benz USA LLC To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or 366 0123 in Washington D C area or write to NHTSA U S Department of Transportation Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor ve hicle safety from the Hotline Multifunction st Overhead control pane At a glance Cockpit YV Cockpit O O0 eee Item Headlamp washer switch Combination switch e Turn signals e Windshield wipers e High beam Cruise control lever Instrument cluster Multifunction steering wheel Horn Lever for voice control system see separate op erating instructions Overhead control panel Glove box lid release Page 148 48 48 49 102 194 22 105 24 110 27 200 e000 OOOH OOOO Item Glove box lid Center console Starter switch Steering wheel adjustment handle manual Hood lock release Parking brake p
166. fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint AN Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest reclined Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous You could slide under the seat belt in a collision If you slide under it the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck That could cause serious or even fatal injuries The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best re straint when the wearer is in an upright po sition and the belt is properly positioned on the body Warning A Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re strained with a separate seat belt Warning A Read and observe the additional warning no tices printed in the Safety and Security section page 60 Warning The seat belt presenter for driver and pas senger makes it easier to put on the seat belt Seat belt presenter gt Manually adjust the seat belt presenter to the desired position i The seat belt presenter must be put back to its original position before lean ing the seat backrest toward the rear or letting someone enter the rear passen ger compartment Latch plate Release button Buckle gt With a smooth motion pull the belt from the belt outlet Pla
167. fication on De mand The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response automatic and man ual emergency roadside assistance and information Tele Aid is initially ac tivated by completing a subscriber agreement and placing an acquain tance call The Tele Aid system is operational pro vided that the vehicle s battery is charged properly connected not dam aged and cellular and GPS coverage is available Tightening torque Force times lever arm e g a lug wrench with which threaded fasteners such as wheel bolts are tightened Tire speed rating Part of tire designation indicates the speed range for which a tire is ap proved Traction Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires Technical terms VIN Vehicle Identification Number The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the body to uniquely identify each vehicle produced Voice control system Voice control system for car phones portable cell phones and audio sys tems radio CD etc A ABS 23 73 341 Malfunction indicator lamp 258 Messages in display 268 Warning lamp 258 Accelerator position automatic transmission 145 Accident Incase of 51 Activating Air conditioning cooling 156 Air recirculation mode 154 Anti theft alarm system 78 Central locking control system 129 Climate control 151 Defrost 154 Easy entry exit feature 130 ESP 77 Exterior headlamps 48 Exteriorlamps 99 Hazard warning flasher 102 He
168. foglamp 101 High beam flasher 102 High beams 102 Instrument cluster illumination 105 Interior 103 Locator lighting 100 Lowbeam 98 Manual headlamp mode 99 Night security illumination 100 Parking lamps 98 Rear foglamp 101 Settings control system 125 Trunk 104 Limiting the gear range 141 Limp Home Mode 145 Loading 197 Instructions 199 Roof rack 197 Split rear bench seat 197 Locator lighting 100 Setting 126 Lock button 343 Lock buttons 343 Locking 52 82 Fuel filler flap 233 Global SmartKey 83 Vehicle in an emergency 289 Loss of keys 84 Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet 321 Low beam headlamps Messages in display 279 Replacing bulbs 293 295 Lowering Vehicle 306 Lubricants Technical data 330 Luggage cover 197 M Main dimensions 328 Maintenance 249 Vehicles with E85 fuel 335 Malfunction Displaying 118 Malfunction memory 117 Calling up 117 Manual headlamp mode 99 Manual operations Fuel filler flap 291 Interior lighting control 103 Locking the vehicle 289 Sliding pop up roof 292 Unlocking gear selector lever 291 Unlocking the driver s door 288 Unlocking the trunk lid 289 Manual seat Adjusting 33 Adjusting backrest tilt 33 Adjusting head restraint height 34 Adjusting head restraint tilt 34 36 Adjusting seat cushion tilt 33 Adjusting seat height 33 Front seat head restraints 90 Seat fore and aft adjustment 33 Manual transmission 137 Shifting into reverse 138 Starting with 44 MB Te
169. ft reading lamp goes out i The setting selected for the interior lighting is used for the trunk lighting as well If you leave the trunk lid open for an ex tended period of time the trunk light ing will switch off automatically after approximately ten minutes VY Instrument cluster For a full view illustration of the instrument cluster see At a glance gt page 22 The instrument cluster is activated when you e open a door e turn on the ignition e press the reset button gt page 22 e switch on the exterior lamps You can change the instrument cluster settings in the Instrument cluster submenu of the control system gt page 122 Instrument cluster illumination Use the reset button gt page 22 to adjust the illumination brightness for the instru ment cluster i The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or brightened automatically to suit ambient light conditions The instrument cluster illumination will also be adjusted automatically when you switch on the vehicle s exterior lamps Controls in detail Instrument cluster To brighten illumination gt Turn the reset button in the instrument cluster gt page 22 clockwise The instrument cluster illumination will brighten To dim illumination gt Turn the reset button in the instrument cluster gt page 22 counterclockwise The instrument cluster illumination will dim Controls in detail Instr
170. fter six years regardless of the remaining tread Warning Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Direction of rotation Unidirectional tires offer added advantag es such as better aquaplaning perfor mance To benefit however you must ensure that the tires rotate in the direction specified An arrow on the sidewall indicates the in tended direction of tire rotation Checking tire inflation pressure A Warning If the tire pressure drops repeatedly e Check the tires for punctures from for eign objects e Check to see whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim Correct the tire pressure only when tires are cold Regularly check your tire pressure at inter vals of no more than 14 days Operation Tires and wheels If the tires are warm you should only cor rect the tire pressure if it is too low for cur rent operating conditions A table on the fuel filler flap lists the spec ified tire inflation pressures for warm and cold tires as well as for various operating conditions i The pressures listed for light loads are minimum values offering high driving comfort Increased inflation pressures listed for heavier loads may also be used for light loads These higher pressures produce favorable handling characteristics The ride of the vehicle however will be
171. functions are available Vehicles with COMAND For informa tion on setting the time refer to the Funeion Page separate COMAND operating instruc P5552 2191 31 Set time hours 122 tions gt Press or EE to set the hour Set time minutes 122 Select time display mode 123 gt i the a P m Set time minutes p e or E button to the This function can only be seen with audio Select temperature display 123 STRUMENT CLUSTER submenu system mode gt Press button EAN or Bed repeatedly Select speedometer display 124 until you see this message in the dis id mode play TIME SETTINGS HOURS Vehicles with COMAND For informa Select language 124 tion on setting the time refer to the Select display speed display or 125 rela COME NDrope ans MANUE outside temperature gt Move the selection marker with the or ESM button to the IN STRUMENT CLUSTER submenu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until you see this message in the dis play TIME SETTINGS MINUTES The selection marker is on the minute setting TIME SETTINGS MINUTES 12 6 Selecting time display mode gt Move the selection marker with the or E button to the IN STRUMENT CLUSTER submenu Press button aj or R repeatedly until you see this message in the dis play 12 24 Hour The selection marker is on the current setting 12 24 HOUR Press or E to set the 12h or 24h time display mode Controls in detail Control system
172. g gt Make sure the gear selector lever is set to P Do not depress accelerator Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 and hold until the engine starts gt page 31 You can also use the touch start Gearshift pattern for automatic function Turn the SmartKey to transmission position 3 and release it again immedi P Park position with selector lever lock ately The engine then starts automati R Reverse gear cally N Neutral D Drive position gt Depress brake pedal For more information see Automatic The selector lever lock is released transmission gt page 139 pag For information on turning off the engine with the SmartKey see Turning off the en gine gt page 53 Getting started Driving Starting difficulties If the engine does not start as described carry out the following steps gt Turn SmartKey in starter to position 0 and repeat starting procedure Remember that extended starting at tempts can drain the battery gt Geta jump start gt page 310 If the engine does not start after several starting attempts there could be a mal function in the engine electronics or in the fuel supply system gt Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Parking brake Release handle Parking brake Warning When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch and lock the vehicle Do not leave children
173. g Summer opening feature If the roller sunblind is closed gt Press and hold button after un locking the vehicle The windows and the roller sunblind begin to open after approximately one second gt Press and hold button again The panorama sliding pop up roof tilts gt Press and hold button again The panorama sliding pop up roof be gins to open after approximately one second If roller sunblind is already open gt Press and hold button after un locking the vehicle The windows move down and the pan orama sliding pop up roof tilts after approximately one second With the windows fully open press and hold button again The panorama sliding pop up roof be gins to slide open after approximately one second Release transmit button to stop proce dure Closing Convenience feature gt gt Press and hold button after lock ing the vehicle The windows and the panorama slid ing pop up roof begin to close after approximately one second Release the button to stop proce dure Make sure all side windows and the pan orama sliding pop up roof are properly closed before leaving the vehicle Synchronizing the panorama sliding pop up roof and the roller sun blinds It is necessary to resynchronize the pan orama sliding pop up roof after voltage supply interruption due to a disconnected or discharged battery the panorama sliding pop up roof has been closed manuall
174. g it can cause uncon Do not pass belts over sharp edges They sciousness aad leadta death could tear Do not run the engine in confined areas such as garage which are not properly ven tilated If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving have Do not allow the belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism This could damage the belt Never attempt to make modifications to the cause determined and corrected imme seat belts This could impair the effective diately If you must drive under these condi ness of the belts tions drive only with at least one window B x full Gearshift pattern for manual transmission Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly uly open For more information see Manual trans stressed in an accident must be replaced eget mission gt page 137 Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Cen ter Starting gt gt Depress brake pedal Make sure the gearshift lever is in neu tral position no gear selected Fully depress clutch pedal Otherwise the engine cannot be start ed due to the integrated safety inter lock Do not depress accelerator gt Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 3 and hold until the engine starts gt page 31 For information on turning off the engine with the SmartKey see Turning off the en gine gt page 53 Getting started Automatic transmission Startin
175. grated signal transmitter butt i amp er bution 21 gt Press and hold the just trained inte 20 seconds do not hold the button for longer than 30 seconds This proce dure erases any previous settings for all three channels and initializes the memory If you later wish to program a second and or third hand held trans mitter to the remaining two signal transmitter buttons do not repeat this step and begin directly with step 3 or Do not release the buttons until completing step 5 The indicator lamp Q on the integrat ed remote control will flash first slowly and then rapidly grated signal transmitter button and observe the indicator lamp Q If the indicator lamp stays on con stantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the integrated signal transmitter button is pressed and released i If the indicator lamp blinks rapidly for about two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with pro gramming steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may be equipped with the rolling code feature Step 7 gt To program the remaining two buttons repeat the steps above starting with step 3 Rolling code programming To train a garage door opener or other roll ing code devices with the rolling code fea ture follow these instructions after completing the Programming portion steps 1 through 6 of this text A second person may make the fo
176. h affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary A battery will also produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep flames or sparks away from battery avoid improper connection of jumper cables smoking etc Practical hints Battery Never loosen or detach battery termi nal clamps while the engine is running or the SmartKey is in the starter switch Otherwise the alternator and other electronic components could be se verely damaged Have the battery checked regularly by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Refer to Service Booklet for mainte nance intervals or contact your autho rized Mercedes Benz Center for further information Warning VAN Do not place metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit Use leak proof battery only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident 307 Practical hints Battery Warning AN With a disconnected battery you will no longer be able to turn the SmartKey in the starter switch the gear selector lever will remain locked in position P Disconnecting the battery vvvvyyv Turn off all electrical consumers Open the hood gt page 236 Remove the filter box gt page 307 Disconnect the battery negative lead Remove the cover from the positive ter minal Disconnect the battery positive lead Removing the batteries gt Remove the screw nuts securing the battery gt Re
177. h as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Warning Emission control Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law These systems of course will function properly only when maintained strictly ac cording to factory specifications Any ad justments on the engine should therefore be carried out only by qualified Mercedes Benz Center authorized techni cians Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way Moreover the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly Operation Driving instructions according to Mercedes Benz servicing re quirements For details refer to the Service Booklet A Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide CO and inhaling it can cause un consciousness and lead to death Warning Do not run the engine in confined areas such as a garage which are not properly ventilated If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving have the cause determined and corrected immediately If you must drive under these conditions drive with at least one window fully open at all times Operation Driving instructions Coolant temperature During severe operating conditions and stop and go city traffic the coolant tem
178. he message TELE DIAGNOSIS CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction display Roadside Assistance calls can be ter minated using the button on the multifunction steering wheel Information button The Information button is located be low the center armrest cover gt Press and hold the button for longer than two seconds A call to the Customer Assistance Cen ter will be initiated The button will flash while the call is in progress The message INFO CONNECTING CALL will appear in the multifunction display When the connection is established the message INFO CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number model color and location subject to availability of cel lular and GPS signals A voice connection between the Customer Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be estab lished When a voice connection is estab lished the audio system mutes and the message TELE AID INFO CALL ACTIVE appears in the multifunction display Infor mation regarding the operation of your ve hicle the nearest Mercedes Benz Center or Mercedes Benz USA products and ser vices is available to you For more details concerning the Tele Aid system please visit www mbusa com and use your ID and password sent to you sep arately to learn more USA only i The indicator lamp in the Information button rema
179. he passenger door A Left front window Right front window Warning A When closing the windows make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure The closing of the door windows can be im mediately halted by releasing the switch or if switch was pulled past the resistance point and released by either pressing or pulling the respective switch If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pulled the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the window the automatic reversal function will stop the window and open it slightly If the window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the window by pulling and holding the switch or by pressing and hold ing button on the SmartKey the auto matic reversal function will not operate When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from starter switch and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equip ment can cause an accident and or serious personal injury You can also open or close the win dows using the e SmartKey summer opening con venience feature gt page 188 e button in the control panel of the climate control gt page 151 gt Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 Opening the wind
180. he radio will tune to the next highest or lowest channel broadcasting this type of program Controls in detail Audio system Program Descriptive Text PDT In PDT mode you can call up additional in formation on the channel the current track and the performing artists s gt Press the TXT key The station category appears on the display Press the TXT key again within four seconds The title of the current track appears Press the TXT key again within four seconds The name of the musician s of the cur rent track appear on the display 171 Controls in detail Audio system Cassette operation gt Fold display panel back up and press gently on the display panel frame to lock it in place Playing cassettes gt Press button H Do not press directly on the display face Otherwise the display will be damaged The display panel folds down and the cassette compartment becomes ac cessible gt Insert cassette into the cassette com partment until it engages and tap it TAPE gently m A The cassette will be pulled in automati vot I D E l cally The system switches to cassette TREK RIF AUD SB mode Side 1 will be played and SIDE 1 PPT TEL appears in the display Side 1 is the side of the cassette which is facing up ward The cassette deck will automati gt If a cassette is already in the cally detect the type of tape mechanism press button or 172 i A warning
181. heels can be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles 5000 to 10000 km or sooner if necessary according to the de gree of tire wear The same direction of tire rotation must be retained Rotate the wheels before the characteris tic tire wear pattern becomes visible shoulder wear on front wheels and tread center wear on rear wheels Thoroughly clean the inner side of the wheels after each rotation Check and en sure proper tire inflation pressure Warning VAN Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel Wheels could become loose if not tightened with a torque of 80 lb ft 110 Nm Use only genuine Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for your vehicle s rims Y Winter driving Before the onset of winter have your vehi cle winterized at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center This service in cludes e Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze concentration e Addition of cleaning concentrate to the water of the windshield and headlamp cleaning system Add MB Concentrate S to a premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze which is formulated for temperatures below freezing point gt page 338 e Battery test Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature A well charged battery helps to ensure that the engine can be started even at low ambient temperatures e Tire change Mercedes Benz recom mends M S rated radial ply tires with a minimum tread depth of approximately 17 in 4 mm on
182. hen you call up the SAT radio mode for the first time ACQUIRING will appear on the display during the initialization process SATI CH SE FM PTY gt TXT P82 60 4062 31 OUD The last channel selected is called up Entering the Electronic Serial Number ESN The first time SAT radio is called up you must give your SAT radio provider the Elec tronic Serial Number ESN of your SAT receiver over the telephone gt Press the SAT key The radio switches to SAT mode CALL SIRI appears on the display 2 CALL SIRI AUD SAT ESN P82 60 4063 31 gt Press the ESN key The provider s phone number will ap pear first After pressing the ESN key again the ESN number will appear Make note of the phone number and ESN number gt Press the ESN key repeatedly until all required information has appeared on the display Controls in detail Audio system gt Call the telephone number and give provider your ESN number a Credit card information is also required for your application The activation process takes approxi mately five to ten minutes after calling the SIRIUS Service Center Controls in detail Audio system Channel selection The following options are available for se lecting a channel e Direct channel input gt page 170 e Manual tuning gt page 170 e Preset channels gt page 170 Direct channel input SAT es Gri FM PIY gt
183. hing use water pota ble water quality For more information on coolant see Coolant level gt page 241 Operation At the gas station Vehicle lighting Check function and cleanliness For infor mation on replacing light bulbs see Re placing bulbs gt page 293 Exterior lamp switch gt page 98 Tire inflation pressure For information on tire inflation pressure see Checking tire inflation pressure gt page 245 Operation Engine compartment V Engine compartment Hood Hi gt Pull up on the hood do not pull up on To avoid damage to the windshield wip the handle and then release it annie A ers or hood never open the hood if the The hood will be automatically held arning wiper arms are folded forward away open at shoulder height by gas filled from the windshield struts Do not pull the release lever while the vehi cle is in motion Otherwise the hood could be forced open by passing air flow Warning VAN To help prevent personal injury stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running Make sure the hood is properly closed before driving When closing the hood use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers Opening The radiator fan may continue to run for ap proximately 30 seconds or even restart af ter the engine has been turned off Stay gt Pull handle to its stop out of radia clear of fan blades tor grille Handle fo
184. ht po sition and the belt is properly positioned on the body Warning VAN Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly re strained with a separate seat belt Warning A Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked Only use seat belts which have been ap proved by Mercedes Benz Do not make any modifications to the seat belts This can lead to unintended activation or to failure Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians Contact an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Safety and Security Occupant safety Warning A USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY Seat belts can only work when used properly Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this sec tion as that could result in serious inju ries in case of an accident Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all times because seat belts help reduce the likelihood of and potential severity of injuries in accidents includ ing rollovers The integrated restraint system includes SRS driver airbag pas senger front airbag side impact airbags head protection window curtain airbags for side windows ETD seat belt emer gency tensioning device and front seat knee bolsters The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in ce
185. ht remains out have the sys front passenger seat tem checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not use the BabySmart restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired 1 BabySmart is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp Practical hints What to do if Messages in the display The control system shows warning and malfunction messages in the multifunction display Certain warning and malfunction messag es are accompanied by an audible signal Address these messages accordingly and follow the additional instructions given in this Operator s Manual Selecting the malfunction memory menu in the control system gt page 117 displays both cleared and uncleared messages High priority messages appear in the multifunction display in red color Certain messages of high priority cannot be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button Other messages of high priority and messages of less immediate priority can be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button gt page 22 and are then stored in the malfunction message memory gt page 117 Warning VAN All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and where a malfunction is indicated addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Failure to repair condition noted may cause
186. ice indicator gt Switch ignition on The standard display of the control sys tem appears gt page 109 gt Press button R or EN on the mul tifunction steering wheel until the FSS indicator appears in the multifunction display i If the battery is disconnected the days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown by the service indica tor To arrive at the true service dead line you will need to subtract these days from the days shown in the ser vice indicator Do not confuse the service indicator with the engine oil level indicator Ej Resetting the service indicator In the event that the service on your vehi cle is not carried out by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center you can reset the service indicator yourself gt Switch on ignition The standard display of the control sys tem appears gt page 109 gt Press button RA or EN on the mul tifunction steering wheel until the FSS indicator appears in the multifunction display gt Press the reset button for about four seconds This message appears in the multifunc tion display SERVICE INTERVAL RESET WITH R BUTTON FOR 3 SEC gt Toconfirm hold down the reset button for about four seconds The service indicator now displays the reset interval i If the service indicator was inadvertent ly reset have a Mercedes Benz Center correct it Only reset if the proper service has been performed Resetting the sy
187. ice work or repairs Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment which may in turn result in personal injury If you have questions about carrying out any type of service turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes Benz Center We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator s Manual Re printing translation and copying even of excerpts is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing Title illustration no P00 0 1 2284 3 1 Press time 08 20 03 GSP TIP Printed in Germany
188. ided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle The Tele Aid system is available if it has been activated and is operation al Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services connection and cellular air time the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the response cen ter i Location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the re sponse center Warning A If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is il luminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call e g the rele vant cellular phone network is not available The message EMERGENCY CALL CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction display for approx ten seconds Should this occur assistance must be sum moned by other means Initiating an emergency call manually P82 95 2366 31 Cover SOS button gt Briefly press on cover Q The cover will open gt Press SOS button briefly The indicator lamp in the SOS button will flash until the emer gency call is concluded gt Wait for a voice connection to the Re sponse Center gt Close cover Q after the emergency call is concluded Controls in detail Useful features Warning VAN If you feel at an
189. ient cross section and insulated terminal clamps e Always make sure the jumper cabels are not on or near pulleys fans or other parts that move when an engine is started or running Jump starting may only be performed on the battery installed in the engine compartment Avoid repeated and lengthy starting at tempts Do not attempt to start the engine us ing a battery quick charge unit If engine does not run after several un successful starting attempts have it checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts may damage the catalytic converter and may present a fire risk Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal part while the other end is still attached to a battery Warning Keep flames or sparks away from battery Do not smoke Observe all safety instructions and precau tions when handling automotive batteries gt page 242 The battery is located in the engine com partment on the right hand side The terminals for jump starting are located in front of the battery gt Make sure the two vehicles do not touch gt Turn off the engine On both vehicles gt Turn off all electrical consumers gt Apply parking brake gt Shift gear selector lever to position P manual transmission to Neutral ape thy Positive under h
190. ient temperatures Operation Engine compartment Always use washer solvent antifreeze where temperatures may fall below freezing point Failure to do so could re sult in damage to the washer sys tem reservoir Warning A Washer solvent antifreeze is highly flam mable Do not spill washer solvent antifreeze on hot engine parts be cause it may ignite and burn You could be 1 seriously burned Only use washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lenses Improper washer flu For more information see Windshield id can damage the plastic lenses of the washer system and headlamp cleaning headlamps system gt page 338 Operation Tires and wheels Y Tires and wheels See your authorized Mercedes Benz Cen ter for information on tested and recom mended rims and tires for summer and winter operation They can also offer ad vice concerning tire service and purchase A Replace rims or tires with the same designa tion manufacturer and type as shown on the original part See your authorized Mercedes Benz Center for further informa tion If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted Warning e The wheel brakes or suspension compo nents can be damaged e The correct operating clearance of the wheels and the tires are no longer guar anteed A Worn old tires can cause accidents If the tire tread is badly worn or if the tires have sustained damage replace them Warning When
191. ifunction steering wheel YV Multifunction steering wheel Item Page Multifunction display in 109 speedometer Operating control sys 110 tem Selecting the submenu or setting the volume E down to decrease up to increase Telephone Press button to take a call to end a call Item Page Menu systems Press but ton for next system mz for previous system Moving within a menu Press button for next display for previous display Vv Center console Upper part Item Seat heater driver s side ESP control switch Hazard warning flasher switch switching on off Central locking switch Anti theft alarm system in dicator lamp Tow away alarm switch Seat heater passenger side PASS AIRBAG OFF indica tor lamp Audio system or COMAND see separate operating instructions Climate control Page 93 75 102 88 78 79 93 67 159 150 At a glance Center console At a glance Center console Lower part Oo Item Ashtray Gearshift lever for manual transmission Selector lever for automatic transmission Storage compartment Armrest Program mode selector for automatic transmission Page 203 44 45 201 202 144 At a glance Overhead control panel V Overhead control panel Item Page Rear interior lighting 104 on off Panorama sliding pop up 189 roof Right reading lamp on off 104 Interior lighting control 103
192. il SAE 85 W 90 Power steering approx 1 1 US qt 1 0 I MB Power Steering Fluid Pentosin CHF 11S Front wheel hubs approx 2 1 oz 60 g each_ High temperature roller bearing grease Cooling system C 230 Kompressor approx 5 9 US qt 5 6 MB 325 0 Anticorrosion Antifreeze Agent C 320 approx 6 8 US qt 6 4 I Model Fuel tank including a reserve of Air conditioning system Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning sys tem Without headlamp clean ing system With headlamp cleaning system Capacity 16 4 US gal 62 0 I 2 1 US gal 8 0 1 3 2 US qt 3 1 6 4 US qt 61 Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Fuels coolants lubricants etc Premium unleaded gasoline Posted Octane 91 Avg of 96 RON 86 MON Flexible Fuel Vehicles identified by a label reading Premium gasoline or E85 only on fuel filler flap Alternative fuel Ethanol fuel E85 R 134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil never R 12 MB Windshield Washer Concentrate Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate S and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point Follow suggested mixing ratios gt page 338 Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Engine oils Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in our engines Therefore use
193. ility Information on the windshield wipers gt page 49 and for setting the rear view mirrors gt page 39 is found in the Get ting started section Rear view mirrors Interior rear view mirror antiglare posi tion GP 2 w ion P68 40 2061 31 Lever Tilt the mirror to the antiglare night posi tion using lever Q Automatic antiglare rear view mirrors The reflection brightness of the exterior rear view mirror on the driver s side and the interior rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when e the ignition is switched on and e incoming light from headlamps falls on the sensor in the interior rear view mir ror The rear view mirror will not react if e reverse gear is engaged e the interior lighting is turned on A The automatic antiglare function does not react if incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the interior rear view mirror Warning The interior rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver s side do not react for example when transporting cargo which covers the rear window Glare can endanger you and others Warning VAN In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape from the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks Electrolyte has an irritating effect Do not al low the liquid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or respiratory system In case it does immediately flu
194. ill find all the information you need for your first drive You should read this section first if this is your first Mercedes Benz vehicle or if you are rent ing or borrowing this vehicle SSS Safety and Security Here you will find descriptions of the safety features of your vehicle ee Controls in detail Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed in your vehi cle This section expands on the Getting started section and also describes techni cal innovations If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle this section will be of particular interest to you I Operation Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehi cle a ENE Practical hints This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter EEE SSS aaa Technical data All important technical data for your vehi cle can be found in this section E Indexes The glossary provides explanations of the most important technical terms The table of contents and the index are de signed to help you find information quickly and easily The following publications are part of your vehicle documentation e this Operators Manual e the Service Booklet Separate operating instructions will be provided as required depending on the equipment options installed in your vehi cle Introduction Symbols Y Symb
195. in four seconds the radio will return to the station last tuned to P82 60 4057 31 gt Press and hold either the EN or EA button until the desired frequency is reached Step by step station tuning takes place in ascending or descending order of frequency The first three tuning steps will take place without muting After wards the radio will be muted and highspeed tuning will take place until the button is released P82 60 4059 31 gt Press either the EXE or EI button The radio will tune to the next higher or next lower receivable frequency Scan tuning e Starting scan tuning gt Select desired frequency band 983 5 FM AS P82 60 4058 31 SAT gt Press button SC will appear on the display The radio briefly tunes in all receivable stations on the band selected The first scan cycle will tune in only the stations with a strong signal The second scan cycle will tune in every receivable station AM AUD e Ending scan tuning gt Press button or ENS EA EJ or Ea button SC disappears from the display Manual station memory Presets You can store ten AM and ten FM stations e Storing stations gt Tune in the desired station gt Press and hold desired station button E to E until a brief signal tone is heard es 8 5 FM ALD AS P82 60 4057 31 The frequency is stored on the selected station button The frequency band and station button number are shown in
196. includ ing e engine clutch torque converter e transmission e transfer case e drive shaft e differential e axle shafts axles Poly V belt drive Drives engine components alternator AC compressor etc from the engine Program mode selector switch Used to switch the automatic transmis sion between standard operation S and winter operation C Remote Vehicle Diagnostics Transmission of vehicle data and cur rent location to the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Center for sub scribers to Tele Aid service Restraint systems Seat belts belt tensioners airbags and child restraint systems As indepen dant systems their protective func tions complement one another RON Research Octane Number The Research Octane Number for gaso line as determined by a standardized method It is an indication of a gaso line s ability to resist undesired detona tion knocking The average of both the gt MON Motor Octane Number and RON Research Octane Number is posted at the pump also known as AN TI KNOCK INDEX Shift lock When the vehicle is parked this lock prevents the gear selector lever from being moved out of position P without SmartKey turned and brake pedal de pressed SRS Supplemental Restraint System Seat belts emergency tensioning de vice and airbags Though independent systems they are closely interfaced to provide effective occupant protection Tele Aid System Telematic Alarm Identi
197. ing 00 eee eeeeeeeeeee 52 Parking Drake esccscseceeseeeesees 52 Switching off headlamps 0 53 Turning off the engine 53 Safety and Security 55 Occupant Safety ccccessseceeesesteeees 56 Airbags asenisman 57 Seat belts eiee eei ESE 62 Children in the vehicle 0 65 PAMiG Alani oenar 72 ACTIVALIN Stes cesnceetvecscdestecsbesvaeaatees dates 72 Deactivating eeececeseceesseeeeteeeees 72 Driving safety systems eeseeeeseeee 73 ABSen a a 73 BA Serera 74 S aa EEE EEA 75 Anti theft systems cccccsscceeeeeseeees 78 Immobilizer err 78 Anti theft alarm system 78 Tow away alarm eceeesseeeeeeeeeees 79 Controls in detail 81 Locking and unlocking eee 82 KOYSecsevecvi dcssesstlecsaseseste och cleceveceeneeees 82 Opening the doors from the inside 85 Opening the trunk lid eee 85 Closing the trunk lid oo eeeeeeeeeee 86 Trunk lid emergency release 86 Automatic central locking 87 Locking and unlocking from the inside s es 88 SCALS ES A E EE 89 Easy entry exit feature 89 Removing and installing front seat head restraints 90 Rear seat head restraints 91 Heated Seats 0 ee eeeseseeseeees 93 Memory fUnction eeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeee 95 Storing positions into memory 96 Recalling positions from memory
198. ing and switch to Play Stopping track search gt Press FN EA EJ o E button The cassette will switch over to Play 173 Controls in detail Audio system Scanning e Starting scan Fast forward reverse e Starting cassette fast forward mode TAPE SC Cor ft be pmi pm SEEK FWD NR TRE gt Press button SC will appear on the display SB P82 60 4074 31 AID Each track on the cassette will be played briefly in ascending order e Stopping scan gt Press R EN EA EI or Ea button The system will switch to Play 174 TAFE pee peg pame prs prs TWIP TEK WE ALD SB gt Press RN button FORWARD will appear on the display e Starting cassette fast reverse mode gt Press button REWIND will appear on the display The cassette will automatically switch over to the play mode at the end or beginning of the tape e Stopping the cassette fast forward re verse mode gt Press INI BR IESE or Ea button The cassette will switch over to the play mode Skipping blank sections skip blank Switching on the skip blank function gt Press the SB key SB is highlighted in the display If the system does not detect a sound signal the cassette will automatically fast forward to the next sound signal Switching off the skip blank function gt Press the SB key The highlighted SB in the display disap pears Dolby NR noise reduction system To enable optimum
199. ing forward 198 Folding rearward 198 BAS 74 341 Messages in display 265 Batteries SmartKey Changing 290 Check lamp 83 Checking 84 Battery discharged Jump starting 310 Battery vehicle 242 307 Charging 308 Disconnecting 308 Messages in display 269 Reconnecting 308 Reinstalling 308 Removing 308 Bi Xenon headlamps 341 Bi Xenon type Front lamp bulbs 296 Block heater 248 Bolts For spare wheel 287 Brake assist system BAS 341 Brake fluid 234 332 Brake lamp bulbs 294 Brake lamp high mounted 294 Brake pads Message in display 270 Brakes 224 Warning lamp 259 Break in period 222 Bulbs replacing 293 Additional turn signals Brake lamps 294 Foglamps 293 Frontlamps 293 High beam 293 High mounted brake lamp 294 License plate lamps 294 299 Low beam 293 Parking lamps 293 294 296 297 Rear fog lamp 294 Rear fog lamps 298 Side marker lamps 294 298 Standing lamps 293 294 296 297 Taillamp assemblies 294 298 Turn signal lamps 293 294 Button Audio system 162 293 Cc CAC Customer Assistance Center 341 Calling up Range distance to empty Service indicator 250 CAN system 341 Capacities Fuels coolants lubricants etc Cargo compartment Lighting 104 Cassette operation Playing cassettes 172 Cassette player Operating 116 Catalytic converter 231 CD changer 175 CD operation 175 CD player Operating 116 Center console 25 134 330 Lower part 26 PASS AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 26
200. ing pop up roof gt page 188 Practical hints Jump starting V Jump starting AN Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death Warning Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting you might get injured Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes skin or clothing In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary A battery will also produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and very explosive Keep flames or sparks away from battery avoid improper connection of jumper cables smoking etc Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding causing personal injury Read all instructions before proceeding If the battery is discharged the engine can be started with jumper cables and the bat tery of another vehicle Observe the follow ing e Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic convert er are cold e Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen Let the battery thaw out first e Only jump start from batteries with the same voltage rating 12 V Jump start ing with a more powerful battery could damage the vehicle s electrical system which will not be covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty e Use only jumper cables with suffic
201. ings for bass and treble are stored separately for the AM and FM frequency bands satellite radio SAT mode cassette mode and CD mode Bass gt Regardless of operating mode press the AUD key repeatedly until BASS appears on the display FM BASS EXT AUD gt P82 60 4081 31 gt Press or key to increase or de crease level or gt Press both and keys simultaneously to reset the Bass to its center flat lev el Treble gt Regardless of operating mode press the AUD key repeatedly until TREBLE appears on the display FM TREBLE Est AUD gt P82 60 4082 31 gt Press or key to increase or decrease level or gt Press both and keys simultaneously to reset the Treble to its center flat level Controls in detail Audio system Fader i Your vehicle may or may not have the fader function depending on the vehicle equipment and model gt Regardless of operating mode press the AUD key repeatedly until FADER appears on the display FM FADER ExT AUD F R gt P82 60 4083 31 gt Press F or R key to shift sound accord ingly to the front or rear speakers or gt Press both F and Rkeys simultaneously to reset the Fader to its center level Controls in detail Audio system Balance Returning audio functions to factory gt Regardless of operating mode press settings the AUD key repeatedly until BALANCE appears on the display Fr BA
202. initiated automatical ly e following an accident in which the emergency tensioning devices ETDs or airbags deploy e if the anti theft alarm or the tow away alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds See anti theft alarm sys tem gt page 78 and tow away alarm gt page 79 An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover next to the inside rear view mirror labeled SOS then briefly pressing the button located under the cover See below for instructions on initiating an emergency call manually Once the emergency call is in progress the indicator lamp in the SOS button will be gin to flash The message EMERGENCY CALL CONNECTING CALL appears in the multi function display When the connection is established the message EMERGENCY CALL CALL CONNECTED appears in the multi function display All information relevant to the emergency such as the location of the vehicle determined by the GPS satellite lo cation system vehicle model identifica tion number and color are generated A voice connection between the Response Center and the occupants of the vehicle will be established automatically soon af ter the emergency call has been initiated When a voice connection is established the audio system mutes and the message TELE AID EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE ap pears in the multifunction display The Re sponse Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the accident prov
203. ins illuminated in red for approx ten seconds during the sys tem self check after turning SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 to gether with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button Fag Controls in detail Useful features See System self check gt page 207 when the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than ap proximately ten seconds If the indicator lamp in the Information button is illuminated continuous ly and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call e g the relevant cellular phone network is not avail able The message INFO CALL FAILED appears in the multifunc tion display Information calls can be terminated us ing the button on the multifunc tion steering wheel Controls in detail Useful features If the indicator lamps do not start flash ing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated in red at any time the Tele Aid system has detected a fault or the service is not currently ac tive and may not initiate a call Visit your Mercedes Benz Center and have the system checked or contact the Re sponse Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada as soon as possible Upgrade signals The Tele Aid system processes calls using the following priority e Automatic emergency First priority e Manual emergency Second p
204. ion remote door unlock and more The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS Global Positioning System satel lites for vehicle location If either of these signals are unavailable the Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs assistance must be sum moned by other means System self check Initially after turning the SmartKey in starter switch to position 2 malfunctions are detected and indicated the indicator lamps in the SOS button the Roadside As sistance button and the Information button stay on longer than ten seconds or do not come on The mes sage TELE AID MALFUNCTION DRIVE TO WORKSHOP appears for approx ten seconds in the multifunction display Controls in detail Useful features Warning A If the indicator lamps in the SOS button in the Roadside Assistance button and or in the Information button do not come on dur ing the system self check or if any of these indicators remain illuminated constantly in red and or the message TELE AID MAL FUNCTION DRIVE TO WORKSHOP is dis played in the multifunction display after the system self check a malfunction in the sys tem has been detected If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above the system may not operate as ex pected Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible 207 Controls in detail Useful features Emergency calls An emergency call is
205. ion alarm is trig gered for example if the vehicle is lift ed on one side If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds an emergency call is initi ated automatically by the Tele Aid sys tem provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available Safety and Security Anti theft systems Arming tow away alarm When you lock your vehicle the tow away alarm is automatically armed after about 30 seconds When you unlock your vehicle the tow away protection disarms automatically Safety and Security Anti theft systems Disarming tow away alarm To prevent triggering the tow away alarm feature switch off the tow away alarm be fore towing the vehicle or when parking on a surface subject to movement such as a ferry or auto train Tow away alarm off switch Indicator lamp The switch is located on the center con sole gt Turn off the ignition and remove the SmartKey i You cannot disarm the tow away alarm while the ignition is turned on gt Press upper half Q of the switch Indicator lamp in the switch comes on briefly gt Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey The tow away alarm remains disarmed un til you lock your vehicle again Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Seats Memory function Lighting er Control syste a Manual transmission Controls in detail L
206. is being used The left tail lamp is malfunctioning A backup bulb is being used Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt gt gt Insert SmartKey in the starter switch Switch off the headlights Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Replace the bulb as soon as possible Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution TAIL LIGHT R The right tail lamp is malfunctioning gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz CHECK LIGHTS A backup bulb is being used Center as soon as possible BACK UP LIGHT ON TR SUG Lr The left front turn signal lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible CHECK LIGHT malfunctioning TURN SIG RF The right front turn signal lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible CHECK LIGHT malfunctioning TURN SIG LR The left rear turn signal lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible CHECK LIGHT malfunctioning TURN SIG RR The right rear turn signal lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible CHECK LIGHT malfunctioning TURN SIG MIRROR L The left turn signal in the exterior
207. ited Warranty or could compromise the vehicle s dura bility or safety Vv Warranty coverage Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will ex change or repair any defective parts origi nally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties e New Vehicle Limited Warranty e Emission System Warranty e Emission Performance Warranty e California Maine Massachusetts and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes Benz Spare Parts and Accessories warranties copies of which are available at any Mercedes Benz Center Technical data Warranty coverage Loss of Service and Warranty Information Booklet Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information booklet have your authorized Mercedes Benz Center arrange for a re placement It will be mailed to you Technical data Identification labels Y Identification labels Mi Certification label Vehicle Identification Number VIN Information label California version Vacuum line routing for emission con trol system Engine number engraved on engine VIN visible lower edge of windshield Emission control label When ordering spare parts please specify vehicle identification and engine numbers V Layout of poly V belt drive
208. ith two LATCH ufacturer s instructions Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren i type anchors at each of the rear seats for the installation of a LATCH child seat with the matching anchor fittings If a child seat is not installed the LATCH anchors can be folded back between the seat cushion and the backrest A Anchors Button gt Grip inner side of anchors and fold forward until they audibly lock in place The child seat must be firmly attached in the right and left side anchors To fold anchors back gt Press down button on each anchor and return anchor to its catch i Non LATCH type child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle s seat belt system Install child seat according to the manufacturer s instructions lt P91 22 2095 31 Warning VAN Children too big for child restraint systems must ride in back seats using regular seat belts Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder not face or neck A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 Ibs until they reach a height where a lap shoulder belt fits properly without a booster Before installing the child seat make sure anchors are folded out and locked in place Install child seat according to manufactur er s instructions The child seat must be firmly attached in the right and left side anchors Q An incorrectly mounted child
209. ity and that Snow chains should only be used on the rear wheels Follow the manufac overall driving stability may be reduced Adapt your driving style accordingly Have the spare tire replaced with a winter tire at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Block heater Canada only The engine is equipped with a block heat er The electrical cable may be installed at your authorized Mercedes Benz Center B When driving with snow chains you may wish to deactivate the ESP gt page 75 before setting the vehicle in motion This will improve the vehi cle s traction turer s mounting instructions Only use snow chains that are approved by Mercedes Benz Your authorized Mercedes Benz Center will be glad to advise you on this subject Use of snow chains may be prohibited depending on location Always check local and state laws before installing snow chains Use of snow chains is not permissible with tire sizes e 225 45 R17 Vv Maintenance We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by your authorized Mercedes Benz Center in accordance with the Service Booklet at the times called for by the FSS Flexible Service System Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance with the Service Booklet at the designated times mileage called for by the FSS may result in vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty FSS will notify you when your next service is due
210. ity of a serious or even fatal ac cident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs Operation Driving instructions Pedals A Keep driver s foot area clear at all times Ob jects stored in this area may impair pedal movement Warning Power assistance A With the engine not running there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems In this case it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve hicle Warning Operation Driving instructions Brakes A After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through wa ter deep enough to wet brake components the first braking action may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking ef fect Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front Warning Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads It can also result in the brakes overheating thereby significantly reducing their effec tiveness It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci dent To help prevent brake disk corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces particularly salted roads it is advisable to brake the vehicle with c
211. iving instructions Mercedes Benz recommends M S rated radial ply tires with a minimum tread depth of approximately PA in 4 mm on all four wheels for the winter season to ensure normal balanced handling characteristics On packed snow they can reduce your stopping distance as compared to summer tires Stopping distance however is still considerably greater than when the road is not covered with snow or ice Exercise ap propriate caution Avoid spinning of a drive wheel This may cause serious damage to the driv etrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Operation Driving instructions Tire speed rating Regardless of the tire speed rating local speed limits should be obeyed Use pru dent driving speeds appropriate to prevail ing conditions AN Even when permitted by law never operate a vehicle at greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires Warning Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail ure causing loss of vehicle control and pos sibly resulting in an accident and or personal injury and possible death for you and for others C 230 Kompressor standard in U S A optional in Canada C 320 Your vehicle is factory equipped with W rated tires which have a speed rating of 168 mph 270 km h An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph 210 km h C 230 Kompressor standard
212. k clockwise to e slide roof closed e raise roof at the rear gt Turn crank counterclockwise to e slide roof open e lower roof at the rear The panorama sliding pop up roof must be resynchronized after being operated man ually gt page 193 Vv Replacing bulbs Safe vehicle operation depends on proper exterior lighting and signaling It is there fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as semblies are in good working order at all times Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important Have headlamps checked and readjusted at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced See your autho rized Mercedes Benz Center for headlamp adjustment Backup bulbs will be brought into use when the following lamps malfunction e Rear fog lamp e Tail lamps e Standing lamps P54 00 2349 31 Practical hints Replacing bulbs Front lamps Lamp Type Additional turn sig LED nal lamps Turn signal lamp 1156A Halogen headlamp Turn signal lamp 2357A Bi Xenon headlamp Halogen headlamps H7 55W Low beam Bi Xenon head D2S 35W lamps Low and high beam Halogen headlamps H7 55 W High beam Bi Xenon head H7 55 W lamps High beam flasher Parking and stand W5W ing lamp Fog lamp HB4 9006 55 W Practical hints Replacing bulbs Rear lamps Lamp Side marker lamp High mounted brake lamp License plate lamps Brake lamp Turn signal lamp Tail parking stand
213. k to slide roof open Warning A When opening or closing the panorama sliding pop up roof make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the open ing or closing procedure The opening procedure of the panorama sliding pop up roof can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or if the switch was moved past the resistance point and released by moving the switch in any di rection The closing procedure of the panorama sliding pop up roof can be immediately halted by releasing the switch When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from starter switch and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equip ment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Controls in detail Panorama sliding pop up roof Opening the panorama sliding pop up roof automatically H iJ Do not transport any objects that pro You can also open or close the panora trude out of the panorama ma sliding pop up roof using the sliding pop up roof as the seals could be damaged gt Move the switch past the resistance SmartKey summer opening con point in direction and release venience feature gt page 192 The panorama sliding pop up roof will Do not open the panorama not open completely Pe t in th of sliding pop up roof if there is snow or mutton in the contro pane o ice on the roof a
214. ks rapidly Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds The codes of all three channels are erased i If you sell your vehicle erase the codes of all three channels Controls in detail Useful features Reprogramming a single integrated signal transmitter button To program a device using a signal trans mitter button previously trained follow these steps gt Press and hold the desired signal trans mitter button or Do not re lease the button gt The indicator lamp will begin to flash af ter 20 seconds Without releasing the integrated signal transmitter button proceed with programming starting with step 3 vpera The first 1000 miles 1500km BE Driving instructions A lt S atio Maintenance ehicle care Operation The first 1000 miles 1500km In the Operation section you will find de tailed information on operating maintain ing and caring for your vehicle V The first 1000 miles 1500km The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break in period the more satis fied you will be with its performance later on e Drive your vehicle during the first 1000 miles 1500 km at varying but moderate vehicle and engine speeds e During this period avoid heavy loads full throttle driving and excessive en gine speeds no more than 2 3 of max imum rpm in each gear e Shift gears in a timely manner e Avoid accelerating by kick down
215. le Individual settings 118 121 Locking 25 Locking in an emergency 289 Lowering 306 Performance in cold weather 335 Performance in hot weather 335 Service battery 307 Towing 313 Unlocking 25 Unlocking in an emergency 288 With flexible fuel 334 Vehicle battery 307 Vehicle care 251 Cup holder 255 Engine cleaning 253 Gear selector lever 255 Hard plastic trim items 255 Headlamps 253 Instrument cluster 255 Leather upholstery 256 Light alloy wheels 254 MB Tex upholstery 256 Ornamental moldings 253 Paintwork 252 Plastic and rubber parts 256 Power washer 252 Seat belts 255 side markers 253 Steering wheel 255 Tail lamps 253 Tar stains 252 Turn signals 253 Upholstery 256 Vehicle washing 253 Window cleaning 254 Wiper blades 254 Wood trims 256 Vehicle jack 286 Vehicle lighting Checking 235 Vehicle tool kit 285 Alignment bolt 285 Spare fuses 285 Special fuse puller 285 Towing eye bolt 285 Vehicle jack 285 Wheel bolts 285 Wheel wrench 285 Vehicle washing 253 Ventilated storage compartment 157 Ventilation Storage compartment 157 VIN Vehicle Identification Number 345 Voice control system 345 Voice recognition system Hands free microphone 27 Ww Warning sounds Drivers seat belts 62 Parking brake 47 Warranty coverage 321 Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid Washing the vehicle 251 Wear pattern tires 246 Weights 329 Wheel change Tightening torque 306 Wheels Rotating 246 Tires and wheels 244 Win
216. ler neck gt Add engine oil as required Be careful not to overfill with oil Be careful not to spill any oil when adding Avoid environmental damage caused by oil entering the ground or water Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty gt Screw oil filler cap back on filler neck For more information on engine oil see Technical data section gt page 330 Transmission fluid level The transmission fluid level does not need to be checked If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions have an authorized Mercedes Benz Center check the transmission Coolant level The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion antifreeze To check the coolant level the vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine must be cool The coolant expansion tank is located on the passenger side of the engine compart ment For more information on coolant see Coolants gt page 336 Warning A In order to avoid any possibly serious burns Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system or if the coolant temperature display in dicates that the coolant is overheated Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if engine temperature is above 194xF 90xC Allow engine to cool
217. llowing training procedures quicker and easier Step 8 gt Locate training button on the garage door opener motor head unit Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand Depending on manufacturer the train ing button may also be referred to as learn or smart button If there is dif ficulty locating the transmitting button refer to the garage door opener opera tor s manual Controls in detail Useful features Step 9 gt Press training button on the garage door opener motor head unit The training light is activated You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow ing step Step 10 gt Firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed integrated signal transmitter button or Step 11 gt Press hold for two seconds and re lease same button a second time to complete the training process Some garage door openers or other rolling code equipped devices may require you to perform this procedure a third time to complete the training gt D 217 Controls in detail Useful features gt DStep 12 gt Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the programmed integrated signal transmitter button or Step 13 gt To program the remaining two buttons repeat the steps above starting with step 3 Gate operator Canadian programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter
218. llu mination Locator lighting and night security illumi nation are described in the control system section under Setting locator lighting gt page 126 and Exterior lamps delayed shut off gt page 127 Switching on fog lamps 0 Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and or the low beam headlamps on Fog lamps should only be used in conjunction with low beam headlamps Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding allow able lamp operation Switching on front fog lamps A In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions only switch from position J to with the vehicle at a standstill Switching from EGR to will briefly switch off the headlamps Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident Warning gt Make sure the low beam headlamps are switched on gt Pull out exterior lamp switch to first stop The green indicator lamp in the lamp switch comes on Controls in detail Lighting Switching on rear fog lamps gt Make sure the low beam headlamps are switched on Pull out exterior lamp switch to second stop The yellow indicator lamp in the lamp switch comes on Controls in detail Lighting Combination switch The combination switch is located on the left side of the steering column High beam High beam flasher Switching on high beams gt Turn exterior lamp switch to position or to BURJ
219. located To prevent possible personal injury always on the inside of the trunk lid The trunk can also be opened from its in keep hands and fingers away from the trunk nee 4 side in an emergency see Trunk lid emer opening when closing the trunk Be espe y gency release gt page 86 cially careful when small children are y 4 around Closing the trunk lid Warning A Only drive with the trunk closed Among other dangers such as your view being P80 20 2518 31 blocked exhaust fumes may enter the vehi Emergency release button cle interior gt Briefly press emergency release button wd 9 The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid To prevent an inadvertent lockout do E Handle opens not place the SmartKey in the trunk gt Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on Hi grip The trunk lid swings open upwards au gt Close trunk lid with hands placed flat tomatically Always make sure there is on it sufficient overhead clearance i The emergency release button unlocks and opens the trunk while the vehicle is standing or driving The emergency release button does not open the trunk lid if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected Illumination of the emergency release but ton e The button will flash for 30 minutes af ter opening the trunk e The button will flash for 60 minutes af ter closing the trunk i If the emergency release button is pressed and the vehicle was cen
220. loth or sponge Operation Vehicle care Wiper blades gt Fold wiper arms forward A For safety reasons switch off wipers and re move SmartKey from starter switch before cleaning the wiper blades otherwise the wiper motor might suddenly turn on and cause injury Warning gt Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean cloth and detergent solution Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield Window cleaning gt Fold wiper arms forward AN For safety reasons switch off wipers and re move SmartKey from starter switch before cleaning the wiper blades otherwise the wiper motor might suddenly turn on and cause injury Warning gt Use a window cleaning solution on all glass surfaces Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the SmartKey in the starter switch Hold onto the wiper when folding the wiper arm back If released the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield Light alloy wheels Mercedes Benz approved Wheel Care should be used for regular cleaning of the light alloy wheels If possible clean wheels once a week with Mercedes Benz approved Wheel Care us ing a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of wate
221. ly to the left The climate control system will corre spondingly adjust the interior air tem perature Adjusting air distribution and volume _ Use the air distribution control gt page 151 to adjust the air distribution The following symbols are found on the controls Symbol Function Directs air through the cen ter side and rear passen ger compartment air vents Directs air to the windows Directs air into the entire vehicle interior Directs air to the footwells a Controls in detail Climate control Use the air volume control to adjust the air volume You can select between six air volume speeds Adjusting manually Press the WIJ button The indicator lamp on the button goes out gt Select any of the six air volume speeds using the air volume control gt page 151 and the air distribution Adjusting automatically gt Press the Rg button The indicator lamp on the button comes on The air distribution and vol ume is adjusted automatically Windshield fogged on the outside gt Switch the windshield wipers on gt Switch to manual mode gt Turn the air distribution control to MEE or EEA Controls in detail Climate control Defrosting i These settings should only be selected for a short time Activating gt Press button KA gt page 151 The indicator lamp on the button comes on or Switch off air recirculation if selected Press
222. ments 333 Reserve warning 23 Switching Flexible fuel vehicle 334 Technical data 330 Fuel additives 334 249 342 Fuel consumption statistics After start 133 Since last reset 133 Fuel filler flap 233 Locking 233 Opening 291 Unlocking 233 Fuel requirements 333 Fuel reserve tank Message in display 277 Fuel tank Capacity 331 Filler flap 233 Fuels coolants lubricants etc Capacities 330 Functions control system Resetting 120 Fuse box 317 Fuse chart 317 Fuse extractor 318 Fuses 317 110 113 Auxiliary fuse box in trunk 318 Fuse box in engine compartment 317 Fuse box in passenger compartment 317 Fuse chart 317 Fuse extractor 318 G Garage door opener 27 214 Gasoline see Fuel 234 Gasoline additives 334 Gear range 342 Automatic transmission 141 Limiting 141 Shifting into optimal 140 Gear range limit Canceling 140 Gear selector lever 291 Cleaning 255 Position 142 Unlocking manually 291 Global Locking 83 Unlocking 83 Global Positioning System GPS 343 Glove box 21 200 Closing 200 Opening 200 Good visibility 146 GPS 343 H Halogen type Front lamp bulbs 295 Hands free microphone 27 Hard plastic trim items Cleaning 255 Hazard warning flasher 102 Switching off 102 Switching on 102 Head restraints 90 Manual seats 34 Power seats 36 Rearseats 91 Headlamp cleaning system 243 Headlamps Automatic control 99 Bi Xenon 341 Bi Xenon type Replacing bulbs 296 Cleaning 253 Cleaning system 148
223. menu will reset to factory settings i The settings you have changed will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset button a second time Approximately five seconds after pressing the reset button for the sec ond time the SETTINGS menu reap pears in the display The table below shows what settings can be changed within the various menus De tailed instructions on making individual settings can be found on the following pages INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Set time hours Set time minutes Select time display mode Select temperature display mode Select speedometer display mode Select language Select display speed display or outside temperature LIGHTING VEHICLE Set daytime running lamp mode Set station selection mode USA only radio Set locator lighting Set automatic locking Exterior lamps delayed shut off Interior lighting delayed shut off Controls in detail Control system CONVENIENCE Activate easy entry exit feature Set key dependency Set parking position for exterior rear view mirror Controls in detail Control system Instrument cluster submenu Set time hours The selection marker is on the hour set Access the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu This function can only be seen with audio ting via the SETTINGS menu Use the INSTRU system TIME SETTINGS MENT CLUSTER submenu to change the in strument cluster display settings The eb HOURS 52 30 following
224. move the battery bracket gt Take out the battery Charging and reinstalling batteries gt Charge battery in accordance with the instructions of the battery charger manufacturer gt Reinstall the charged battery Follow the previously described steps in re verse order A Never charge a battery while still installed in the vehicle Gases may escape during charg ing and cause explosions that may result in paint damage corrosion or personal injury Warning Turn off all electrical consumers Connect the positive lead and fasten its cover Connect the negative lead p NEVER invert the terminal connections Reinstall the filter box gt page 307 The battery its filler caps and the vent tube must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation Practical hints Battery i Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly Large 12 volt storage batteries contain lead Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries e Set the clock gt page 122 vehi for recycling cles with COMAND see COMAND operator s manual The following procedures must be car ried out following any interruption of battery power e g due to reconnec tion e Resynchronize the ESP gt page 266 e Resynchronize side windows gt page 188 e Resynchronize panorama slid
225. n Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Individual setting Restoring to factory setting To prevent possible malfunction avoid gt Press and hold buttons and exposing the SmartKey to high levels of _ electromagnetic radiation If you frequently travel alone you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey so that simultaneously for about six seconds pressing only unlocks the driver s until battery check lamp 4 flashes door and the fuel filler flap twice Factory setting gt Press and hold buttons and Warning VAN simultaneously for about five seconds Global unlocking until battery check lamp flashes gt Press button gy All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up The vehicle will lock again automatically within approximately 40 seconds of un locking if neither door nor trunk lid is opened the SmartKey is not inserted in the starter switch or the central locking switch is not activated Global locking gt Press button EEN All turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs in the doors move down twice The SmartKey will then function as fol lows Unlocking driver s door and fuel filler flap gt Press button once Global unlocking gt Press button twice Global locking gt Press button EEN When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unatte
226. n to selected memory po steering wheel and exterior rear view sition mirrors have fully moved to the stored Press memory button Q positions Release memory button and press iJ aa button button 2 within three seconds Releasing the button immediately tored position button j All the settings are stored at the select stops movement to the stored posi gt Make sure the ignition is switched on ed position tions or the relevant door is open and the SmartKey is inserted in the starter switch Warning A Do not operate the power seats using the memory button if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined position Doing so could cause damage to front or rear seats First move backrest to an upright position Storing exterior rear view mirror park ing position For easier parking you can adjust the pas senger side exterior rear view mirror so that you can see the right rear wheel as soon as you engage reverse gear R For information on activating the parking position see see Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position gt page 147 You can store a parking position for the passenger side exterior rear view mir ror for each SmartKey using the memo ry switch Adjustment button Passenger side exterior rear view mir ror Memory button gt Stop the vehicle gt Switch ignition on if not already on gt Press button The passenger side exterior rear view
227. n gine compartment after every engine cleaning Before applying all control link age bushings and joints should be lubricat ed The poly V belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax Vehicle washing Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight Use only a mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes Benz ap proved Car Shampoo Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif fused jet of water Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry with a chamois Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish Due to the width of the vehicle fold in ex terior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors In the winter thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possible When washing the underbody do not for get to clean the inner sides of the wheels Operation Vehicle care Ornamental moldings For regular cleaning and care of very dirty chrome plated parts use a chrome clean er Headlamps tail lamps side markers turn signal lenses Use a mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes Benz approved Car Shampoo with plenty of water To prevent scratches never apply strong force and use only a soft non scratchy cloth when cleaning the lenses Do not at tempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry c
228. n 115 Select satellite radio station 11S Operate CD player 116 Operate cassette player 116 Controls in detail Control system Select radio station gt Press button R or EN repeatedly Select satellite radio station gt Turn on the radio gt page 160 Vehi until the desired station is found The Sirius Satellite Radio is treated as a ra cles with COMAND Refer to separate The type of search depends on the set dio application operating instructions ting for the station tuning gt Select SAT radio with the correspond page 128 gt Press button or repeatedly ing softkey in the radio menu until you see the currently tuned sta e The next stored station is selected tion in the display SP e Station search i You can only store new stations using the corresponding feature on the radio Channel name or number gt page 165 SAT mode and preset number Station frequency Vehicles with COMAND Refer to sep Setting for station selection using Waveband setting arate operating instructions memory Setting for station selection usin E 8 You can also operate the radio in the gt Press button RA or E amp I repeatedly memory n usual manner until the desired channel is found Controls in detail Control system i Feature description is based on prelim inary information available at time of printing For more information on satellite radio operation see Satellite r
229. n accident and or serious personal injury i The cigarette lighter socket can be used to accommodate electrical acces sories up to a maximum 85 W Telephone A Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built in or attached antenna i e with out being connected to an external antenna from inside the vehicle while the engine is running Doing so could lead to a malfunc tion of the vehicle s electronic system pos sibly resulting in an accident and or serious personal injury Warning Radio transmitters such as a portable tele phone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are con nected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle The external antenna must be approved by Mercedes Benz Please contact an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center for informa tion on the installation of an approved external antenna Refer to the radio trans mitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna Controls in detail Useful features A Please do not forget that your primary re sponsibility is to drive the vehicle A driver s attention to the road must always be his her primary focus when driving For your safety and the safety of others we rec ommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a tele phone call Warning If you choose to use the telephone while driving please use the hands free
230. n and has Continue driving with added caution switched off The BAS and the ESP are also Wheels may lock during hard braking switched off see messages in display reducing steering capability The brake system is still functioning normally Have the system checked at an autho but without the ABS available rized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident gt Read and observe messages in the display gt page 264 The charging voltage has fallen below ten gt When the voltage is above this value volts The ABS has switched off again the ABS is operational again gt If necessary have the generator alternator and battery checked Problem Canada only The red brake warning lamp USA only comes on while driving and you hear a warning sound The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving Practical hints What to do if Possible cause Suggested solution You are driving with the gt Release the parking brake parking brake set gt page 46 There is insufficient brake fluid Risk of accident Carefully stop the in the reservoir vehicle and notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Do not add brake fluid This will not solve the problem l Warning A If you find that the brake fluid in the Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi nated can result in an accident Have your brake system checked immediatel
231. n position D Downshifting gt Briefly press the gear selector lever to the left in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmission gt page 141 AN On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order to obtain braking action This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control Your vehicle s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control Warning i To avoid overrevving the engine when the gear selector lever is moved to the D direction the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine s max speed would be exceeded Upshifting gt Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the D direction The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program This action simul taneously extends the gear range of the transmission Canceling gear range limit gt Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D direction until D reappears in the multifunction display The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range D Shifting into optimal gear range gt Press and hold the gear selector lever in the D direction The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration This will involve shifting down one or more gears
232. n system 68 Tele Aid 207 Service Calling up the service indicator 250 Major service Service B 249 Minor service Service A 249 Overdue 249 Spare parts 320 Types 249 When due 249 Service and Warranty Booklet Lossof 321 Service indicator 249 Calling up 250 Clearing 249 250 Service life tires 245 Service System see FSS 249 Setting Convenience functions Cruise control 195 121 129 Daytime running lamp mode 125 126 Exterior rear view mirror parking position 97 Higher speed in cruise control 196 Hours clock 122 Individual vehicle settings 118 Interior lighting delayed shut off 128 Key dependent memory 131 Lamps and lighting control system 125 Language multifunction display 124 Locator lighting 126 Lower speed in cruise control 196 Miles kilometers in speedometer 124 Minutes clock 122 Night security illumination 127 Parking position for exterior rear view mirrors 132 Slower speed in cruise control 196 Speed in cruise control 196 Speedometer display mode 124 Station selection mode 128 Temperature interior 153 Temperature indicator 123 Time display mode Clock 123 Units Speedometer 124 Temperature 123 Settings Convenience functions 129 Factory SmartKey 83 Individual SmartKey 131 Lighting control system 125 Menus and submenus 111 Resetting all control system 119 Resetting inthe submenu 120 Selective 83 Settings menu Functions in 118 Individual vehicle settings 118 Submenus 119 120 Shift l
233. n with lug wrench Cover on right side of rear bumper Cover on right side of front bumper To reinstall cover gt Fit cover and snap into place V Fuses Only install fuses that have been tested and approved by Mercedes Benz and that have the specified amperage rat ing Never attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse Have the cause determined and remedied by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Fuse box in passenger compartment a ee a a Opening gt Pry cover Q open with a screw driver or similar tool gt Remove cover rearward Closing gt Attach the cover in the front gt Fold the cover in until it engages Fuse chart The fuse chart is found in the fuse box in the passenger compartment The amper ages of the fuses are also given there Practical hints Fuses Fuse box in engine compartment The fuse box is located in the engine com partment on the left hand side Retainer 317 Practical hints Fuses Removing installing cover gt Twist screws 2 90 counterclock wise Pull up cover Q Slide out retainer and remove cover by pulling towards front gt Install cover Q in reverse order Opening fuse box Fuse box cover Clamps gt Release clamps p gt Remove cover 4 Closing fuse box Opening trim panel gt Ensure that the sealing rubber is prop gt Turn handles ery paertionen gt Remove trim pan
234. ncline turn the front wheels towards the road curb Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire Controls in detail Automatic transmission Warning A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch take it with you and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Children could move the gear selector lever from position P which could result in an accident and or serious personal injury Controls in detail Automatic transmission Program mode selector switch Hi gt Press program mode selector switch Q repeatedly until the letter of the desired shift program appears in the multifunction display gt page 109 Never change the program mode when the gear selector lever is out of position P This could result in a change of driving characteristics for Select C for comfort driving which you may not be prepared The program mode selector switch is located on the lower part of the center console e The vehicle starts out in second gear both forward and reverse for gentler starts This does not apply if full throttle is applied or gear range 1 is selected e Traction and driving stability are improved on icy roads e Upshifts occur earlier even when
235. nded in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside which could result in an accident and or serious injury Controls in detail Locking and unlocking T Checking the batteries Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key gt Press button or ral Battery check lamp comes on brief If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey then the batteries in the SmartKey are dis If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key you should do the following charged the SmartKey is malfunction ing or the vehicle battery is drained e Check the batteries in the Smart Key and replace them if necessary gt page 290 e Use the mechanical key to unlock the doors gt page 288 Lock the vehicle using the mechanical key gt page 289 e Have the vehicle battery and the battery connections checked by an authorized Mercedes Center If the SmartKey is malfunctioning con tact an authorized Mercedes Benz Cen ter ly to indicate that the SmartKey batter Have the SmartKey deactivated by an ies are in order If battery check lamp does not come on briefly during check then the SmartKey batteries are discharged Replace the batteries gt page 290 You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mercedes Benz Cen ter i If the batteries are checked within sig nal range of the vehicle pressing the or button
236. ng In addition adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control reach opera tion and comfort Both the interior and exterior rear view mirrors should be ad justed for adequate rear vision Fasten seat belts Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210 2 The memory button and stored position switch are located on the door You can store up to three different settings per SmartKey The following settings are saved for each stored position e Driver s seat and backrest position e Steering wheel position e Drivers side exterior rear view mirror position e Passenger side exterior rear view mir ror position e Front passenger seat position These key dependent memory settings can be deactivated if desired gt page 131 Controls in detail Memory function A Do not activate the memory function while driving Activating the memory function while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Warning Controls in detail Memory function Storing positions into memory Recalling positions from memory gt Adjust the seats steering wheel and gt Turn button to selected memory po rear view mirrors to the desired posi sition Honi pagea gt Press and hold button 2 until the seat gt Turn butto
237. ng by pushing gt Fold seat cushion 2 forward and pulling on the backrest gt Fully retract and fold rearward head re straints gt page 92 Warning J If a red indicator is visible with the backrest up then the backrest is not properly locked into position Always lock backrest in its upright position when rear seat bench is occupied or the ex tended cargo compartment is not in use Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the backrest In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle To help avoid personal injury during a colli sion or sudden maneuver exercise care when transporting cargo Loading instructions P00 01 2299 31 The total load weight including vehicle oc cupants and luggage cargo should not ex ceed the vehicle capacity weight indicated on the certification tag which can be found on the left door pillar The handling characteristics of a fully load ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis tribution It is therefore recommended to load the vehicle according to the illustra tions shown with the heaviest items being placed towards the front of the vehicle Always place items being carried against front or rear seat backrests and fasten them as securely as possible The heaviest portion of the cargo should al
238. ng changed Practical hints Flat tire When changing wheel on a hill gt Place chocks on the downhill side blocking both wheels of the other axle gt Take the two piece wheel wrench and the jack out of the vehicle tool kit gt page 285 Assemble wheel wrench A The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle To help avoid personal injury use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack Warning Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised Be certain that the jack is always vertical plumb line when in use es pecially on hills Always try to use the jack on level surface make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take up bracket Al ways lower the vehicle onto sufficient ca pacity jackstands before working under the vehicle P40 10 2727 31 gt On wheel to be changed loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts ap proximately one full turn with wrench The jack take up brackets are located di rectly behind the front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel housings P40 10 2728 31 Jack Crank Take up bracket gt gt v Plac
239. ng conditions may result in an acci dent The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle s lights at all times Controls in detail Lighting i With the daytime running lamp mode activated the low beam headlamps will not be switched off automatically i The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp cannot be switched on manually with exterior lamp switch in position REg To activate the fog lamps turn exterior lamp switch to position and pull the exterior lamp switch to first or sec ond stop Daytime running lamp mode gt Turn exterior lamp switch to position EJ or Gg When the engine is running the low beam headlamps are automatically switched on In low ambient light conditions the parking lamps will also switch on Canada only When you shift from a driving position to position N or P the low beam switches off with a three minute delay For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior lamp switch to position to permit activation of the high beam head lamps USA only The high beam headlamps can also be ac tivated when driving with the daytime run ning lamp mode activated and exterior lamp switch in position IQ To activate the daytime running lamp mode see Setting daytime running lamp mode USA only gt page 125 i For exterior lamp switch see gt page 98 Locator lighting and night security i
240. ng that have the tendency to give off coloring e g when wet etc may cause Wood trims the upholstery to become permanently dis colored By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover contact discoloration will be prevented Dampen cloth using water and use damp cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle Do not use solvents like tar remover or wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as Dedtharupholiery these may be abrasive Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes Benz approved Leather Care Exercise particular care when cleaning per forated leather as its underside should not become wet MB Tex upholstery Pour Mercedes Benz approved Interior Care onto soft lint free cloth and apply with light pressure here will I find Unlocking locking in an emergency Opening closing in an emergency amn Replacing bulbs Replacing wiper blades Flat tire Battery np starting Towing the vehicle j tae Fuses gt Si Practical hints What to do if Y What to do if Lamps in instrument cluster Problem The yellow ABS malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving General information turning the SmartKey in the starter switch If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to to position 2 have it checked and replaced come on during the bulb self check when if necessary Possible cause Suggested solution The ABS has detected a malfunctio
241. ning A Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states the Dis trict of Columbia the U S territories and all Canadian provinces Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system properly secured by a lap shoulder belt or if so equipped a child restraint lower anchorage system that complies with U S Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210 2 A statement by the child restraint man ufacturer of compliance with this stan dard can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruc tion manual provided with the restraint When using any infant or child restraint system be sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer s instructions for installation and use Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant or child restraints Warning VAN Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat except in a Mercedes Benz authorized BabySmar compatible child seat which operates with the BabySmart system installed in the ve hicle to deactivate the passenger front air bag when it is properly installed Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it in flates in a crash If this happen
242. not func tion Stopping windows gt Press or pull respective switch again 187 Controls in detail Power windows Opening and closing the windows with the SmartKey The panorama sliding pop up roof page 189 will also be opened or closed when the power windows are operated with the SmartKey Warning VAN Never operate the windows or panorama sliding pop up roof if there is the possibil ity of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure In the event that the procedure causes po tential danger the procedure can be imme diately halted by releasing the button on the SmartKey To reverse direction of move ment press for opening or for closing gt Aim transmitter eye at the front door handle 188 Opening Summer opening feature gt Press and hold button after un locking the vehicle The windows and panorama slid ing pop up roof gt page 189 begin to open after approximately one second gt Release the button to stop proce dure Closing Convenience feature gt Press and hold button after lock ing the vehicle The windows and panorama slid ing pop up roof begin to close after approximately one second gt Release the button to stop proce dure Make sure all side windows and the pan orama sliding pop up roof are properly closed before leaving the vehicle Synchronizing power windows The power window must be resynchro nize
243. ntial severity of hand arm injury when driver front airbag inflates e Adjust the front passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied e Occupants especially children should never lean their heads in the area of the door where the side airbag inflates This could result in serious injuries or death should the airbag be triggered Always sit upright properly use the seat belts and appropriate size infant or child re straint system e Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat except ina Mercedes Benz authorized BabySmart compatible child seat which operates with the BabySmart system installed in the vehicle to deacti vate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash If this happens serious or fa tal injury will result Failure to follow these instructions can re sult in severe injuries to you or other occu pants If you sell your vehicle you are responsible to make the buyer aware of these points Be sure to give the buyer this Operator s Manu al Warning VAN Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in the rear seat Should you choose to place a child 12 years old or under in the front passenger seat of your vehicle you must properly use a BabySmart child restraint which will turn off the passenger front airbag Ba
244. ntilock brake system ABS 341 Anti theft alarm system Arming 78 Canceling alarm 79 Disarming 79 Anti theft systems 78 Anti theft alarm system 78 Immobilizer 78 Tow away alarm 79 Aquaplaning 227 Armrest Storage compartment in front of Storage spaces 202 Ashtray 203 ATF automatic transmission fluid 241 AUDIO menu 114 Selecting radio station 115 Audio system 159 Audio and telephone operation 159 Button and soft key operation 162 Cassette operation 172 CD operation 175 Operating and display elements 160 Operating safety 159 Operation 162 Radio operation 165 Switching off 162 Switching on 162 Telephone operation 179 Automatic antiglare for rear view mirror 146 Automatic central locking Activating deactivating control system 129 Automatic climate control Deactivating 156 Automatic headlamp mode 99 Automatic lighting control Activating 103 Deactivating 103 Automatic locking when driving 87 Automatic transmission 139 Accelerator position 145 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode 145 Fluid level 241 Gearranges 141 Gear selector lever position 142 Gear shifting malfunctions 145 Kickdown 145 Manual shifting 140 One touch gearshifting 140 Program mode selector switch 144 Selector lever position 139 Starting with 45 Transmission fluid 241 Winter program mode 144 Auxiliary fuse box 318 B BabySmartTM Airbag deactivation system 67 341 Compatible child seats 67 341 Self test 68 Backrest Fold
245. ntrols in detail Audio system Item Function keys Cassette eject Cassette mode selector Telephone mode selector Seek tuning radio Track search cassette CD Speed dialing memory telephone On off Volume Page 173 172 179 166 173 178 183 162 162 Controls in detail Audio system Button and soft key operation In these instructions the alpha numeric keypad right side of radio panel and the function buttons left side of radio panel are referred to as buttons The four keys below the display panel are referred to as soft keys Do not press directly on the display face Otherwise the display will be damaged Operation Switching on off Switching on gt Turn SmartKey in starter switch to position 1 or 2 or gt Turn control knob ROJ i If the radio is switched on without the SmartKey in the starter switch it will automatically switch off again after ap prox 30 minutes Switching off gt Remove SmartKey from starter switch or gt Turn control knob ROJ Adjusting the volume gt Turn control knob ROJ The volume will increase or decrease depending on the direction turned i The volume setting can be selected separately for the telephone audio system and voice control system Adjusting audio functions Press the AUD key to call up the bass tre ble balance and fader functions in the var ious operating modes Sett
246. o the IN STRUMENT CLUSTER submenu gt Press button EAN or Keg repeatedly until you see this message in the dis play SELECT DISPLAY The selection marker is on the current setting SELECT DISPLAY SPEED OUTSIDE TEMP 752 2197 31 gt Press or MJ to select the dis play permanently shown in the multi function display Controls in detail Control system Lighting submenu Setting daytime running lamp mode Access the LIGHTING submenu via the SET USA only TINGS menu Use the LIGHTING submenu gt Move the selection marker with to change the lamp and lighting settings on the or KES button to the LIGHT your vehicle The following functions are ING submenu available gt Press button EAN or RA repeatedly Function Page until you see this message in the dis Set daytime running lamp mode 125 play LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLIGHT MODE USA only The selection marker is on the current Set locator lighting 126 seting Exterior lamps delayed shut off 127 LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLIGHT MODE Interior lighting delayed shut off 12 ghting delayed shut o 8 MANDAL CONSTANT 4 32 2198 31 gt Press or E to select manual or daytime running lamp constant mode This function is not available in countries where daytime running lamps are mandatory gt D gt D Controls in detail Control system With daytime running lamp mode se lected and the exterior lamp switch at position 0 the following lamps will come on
247. o think of the menus and the functions within each menu as being ar ranged in a circular pattern e If you press button or repeatedly you will pass through each menu one after the other e Ifyou press button R or repeatedly you will pass through each function display one after the other in the current menu Inthe SETTINGS menu instead of functions you will find a number of submenus for calling up and changing settings For instructions on using these submenus see Submenus in the Settings menu gt page 119 The number of menus available in the sys tem depends on which optional equipment is installed in your vehicle The menus are described on the following pages Controls in detail Control system Controls in detail Control system Menus AFTER START 06075 mi 1 30 h 50 Mph 21 4 Mpg 72 F 10 30a This is what you will see when you scroll through the menus 149 6 Miles 826753 72 F 10 30a SETTINGS TO RESET R BUTTON FOR 3 SEC 72 F 10 30a 72 F The table on the next page provides an overview of the individual menus NO MALFUNCTION 10 30a P54 32 2312 31 Controls in detail Control system Menus submenus and functions Menu Q Menu 2 Menu G Menu Menu Menu Menu 7 Standard dis AUDIO NAVI Malfunction Settings Trip computer Telephone play memory Coolant temper Select radio sta Activate route Call up malfunc Reset to fa
248. oadside Assistance c000008 12 Change of address or ownership 12 Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada 13 Where to find it cceeeeeesseceeeesneeees 14 SVMBOMS aieri neea i 15 Operating safety eee eeeseeeeseeeeeeeee 16 Proper use of the vehicle 16 Problems with your vehicle 17 Reporting safety defects cee 18 Reporting Safety Defects 18 At a glance 2000 ccccccceeeesrteeeeees 19 COCK Pit ixiisicdicecneuAaeinninuwn 20 Instrument cluster ce eeeeeeeteeeeeeees 22 Multifunction steering wheel 24 Center console ceeseceeceeeesteeeeeeeeee 25 Upper Part wcsccsedseccccssssscsochoveenedeess 25 Lower part ses cacessatecsecesvelaviexsevecesnees 26 Overhead control panel ee eeeeeeee 27 Door Control panel ccesececeesesteeeees 28 Getting started 0 c cc eeeeeeeees 29 WO CKINS csccesctess ceicsieviees esee 30 Unlocking with the SmartKey 30 ACJUSTING 5 sccecevscastesscesesdesdenteusessateeaveets 32 SOAS uer AE RA 32 Steering wheel 37 MINOT S siviccitnea asenn 39 DrVIN E eere ces oneone EE 41 Fastening the seat belt 41 Starting the engine sesse 44 Switching on headlamps 48 Turn signals ossee 48 High b a cv sserevssvsesiesitectcdocpavsers 48 Windshield Wipers sses 49 Problems while driving 0 50 Parking and lock
249. ock 344 Shifting Gear selector lever positions 142 Into optimal gear range automatic transmission 140 Into reverse manual transmission 138 Side impact airbags 61 Side marker lamps Replacing bulbs side markers Cleaning 253 Side windows Automatic closing 187 Automatic opening 187 Cleaning 254 Closing 186 187 Closing fully Express close 187 Closing with SmartKey 188 Opening 186 187 Opening fully Express open 187 Opening with SmartKey 188 Stopping 187 Synchronizing power windows 188 294 298 Signal strength telephone 135 Simultaneous wiping and washing Windshield wipers 50 Single wipe 50 Sliding pop up roof Closing 190 292 Opening 190 292 Opening with SmartKey 192 Stopping 191 SmartKey 82 Locking and unlocking 82 Opening and closing power window with 188 Opening and closing windows 188 Opening the sliding pop up roof with 192 Unlocking with 30 Snow chains 248 Soft keys Audio system 162 Spare parts service 320 Spare tire Inflating 304 Spare wheel 285 Bolts 287 Mounting 301 Speed Saving current 195 Speed settings Cruise control 196 Speedometer 23 Settings units 124 Speedometer display mode Selecting 124 Split rear bench seat 197 SRS 63 345 Indicator lamp 262 Standing lamps 98 Replacing bulbs Standing water Driving instructions Starter switch 21 31 293 294 296 297 229 Positions 31 Starting difficulties 46 Starting position 31 Starting the engine 44 Station radio Se
250. ocking and unlocking In the Controls in detail section you will find detailed information on how to oper ate the equipment installed on your vehi cle If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle this section will be of particular interest to you To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba sic functions of the vehicle refer to the Getting started section of this manual The corresponding page numbers are giv en at the beginning of each segment Y Locking and unlocking Keys Your vehicle comes supplied with two SmartKeys each with remote control and a removable mechanical key The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two keys are a different color to help dis tinguish each key unit The SmartKey provides an extended oper ating range To prevent theft however it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks e the doors e the trunk lid e the fuel filler flap i You can also open and close the power windows gt page 186 and panorama sliding pop up roof gt page 192 us ing the SmartKey P80 35 2109 31 SmartKey with remote controls Lock button Mechanical key locking tab Unlock button Battery check lamp Panic button gt page 72 i Canada only Only vehicles equipped with an anti theft alarm system have SmartKeys with integrated panic butto
251. old right side tail lamp trim aside Reach inside through opening 2 gt Turn release knob Q clockwise ar row The fuel filler flap can now be opened Manually unlocking the gear selector lever In the case of power failure the gear selec tor lever can be manually unlocked e g to tow the vehicle Coin holder Tool Open the storage compartment in front of the center armrest Release coin holder e g using a small coin Swing coin holder aside Insert a tool e g flat blade screw driver into the opening Perform the following two steps simul taneously gt Push the tool down gt Move gear selector lever from position P Reinstall the coin holder after removing the tool from the opening The gear selector lever is locked again when moving it to position P Practical hints Opening closing in an emergency YV Opening closing in an emergency Panorama sliding pop up roof You can open or close the panorama slid ing pop up roof manually should an elec trical malfunction occur The panorama sliding pop up roof drive is located behind the lens of the interior over head light gt Slide both locking tabs 2 in direction of arrow Lower rear of cover and remove Remove cover Do not disconnect electrical connec tors gt Pry off lens Q using a flat blade screw driver gt Obtain crank Insert crank 3 through hole vv Turn cran
252. ollow these instructions increases the risk of an accident Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution The battery was charged with a battery Have the battery checked at a service charger or jump started station The battery is no longer charging gt Stop immediately and check the Possible causes poly V belt e alternator malfunctioning If it is broken e broken poly V belt gt Do not continue to drive Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If it is intact gt Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center UNDERVOLTAGE The battery has insufficient voltage and Start the engine gt page 44 ENGINE ON can no longer supply the convenience functions such as seat heater UNDERVOLTAGE The battery is malfunctioning gt Have the battery checked at a service SWITCH CONSUMERS OFF station O Canada only USA only ee are driving with the parking brake Release the parking brake gt page 46 Practical hints Possible solution What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause Fol BRAKE WEAR VISIT WORKSHOP limit 0 There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir H aming A If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below
253. ols The following symbols are found in this gt This symbol points to instructions for Operator s Manual Warning A you to follow Optional equipment is identified with an asterisk Since standard equipment varies between models the descriptions and illustrations in this manual may differ slightly from gt A number of these symbols appearing in succession indicates a multiple step procedure Warning notices draw your attention to haz ards that may endanger your health or life or the health or life of others Page This symbol tells you where to i T look for further information on a the actual equipment of your vehi topic cle Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle gt D This continuation symbol marks an interrupted procedure which ri will be continued on the next page Helpful hints or further information you may find useful gt In the glossary of technical terms this symbol is used to indicate cross references to term definitions Display Words appearing in the multi function display are printed in the type shown here Introduction Operating safety Vv Operating safety Warning A Work improperly carried out on electronic components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning Because the vehicle s electronic components are in terconnected any modification made may produce an undesired effect on other sys tems Electronic malfunctions could s
254. on on gasoline quality can normally be found on the fuel pump More information on gasoline can be found in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet Flexible Fuel Vehicles are identified by a label reading Premium gasoline or E85 only on the fuel filler flap For more information see Flexible Fuel Vehicles gt page 334 Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the Fg lamp to illuminate For more information see Practical hints section gt page 260 Check regularly and before a long trip Coolant level For more information see Coolant lev el gt page 241 Brake fluid fuse box cover removed Removing fuse box cover see Fuses gt page 317 Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning system For more information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 243 H If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks immediately Noti fy an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem For more information see Practical Hints gt page 259 Engine oil level For more information on engine oil see Engine oil gt page 237 Opening hood see gt page 236 Coolant For normal replenis
255. onents or wiring of the engine or transmission or could result in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake causing severe internal engine damage Any such dam age is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Operation Driving instructions Passenger compartment Warning A Always fasten items being carried as secure ly as possible In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob jects Driving abroad Abroad there is an extensive Mercedes Benz service network at your disposal If you plan to drive into areas which are not listed in the index of your Mercedes Benz Center directory you should request pertinent information from your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Control and operation of radio trans mitter COMAND radio and telephone Warning VAN Please do not forget that your primary re sponsibility is to drive the vehicle safely Only operate the COMAND Cockpit Man agement and Data System radio or tele phone if road weather and traffic conditions permit Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph approximately 50 km h your vehicle is covering a distance of approximately 44 feet approximately 13 5 m every sec ond Observe all legal requirements
256. ons To reduce the risk of personal injury as a re sult of vehicle movement before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always e Keep right foot on brake pedal e Firmly depress parking brake pedal e Move the gear selector lever to position P manual transmission first or reverse gear e Slowly release brake pedal e When parked on an incline turn front wheel against curb e Turn the SmartKey to starter switch position 0 e Take the SmartKey and lock vehicle when leaving Tires AN If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance or you suspect that possi ble damage to your vehicle has occurred you should turn on the hazard warning flash ers carefully slow down and drive with cau tion to an area which is a safe distance from the road Warning Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody for possible damage If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe have it towed to the nearest Mercedes Benz Center or tire dealer for re pairs Tread wear indicators TWI are required by law These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and be come visible at a tread depth of approxi mately 1 16 in 1 6 mm at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced The tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread A Although the applicable federal motor vehi cle safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the tread wear indicators
257. onsiderable force prior to parking The heat generated serves to dry the brakes If your brake system is normally only sub jected to moderate loads you should occa sionally test the effectiveness of the brakes by applying above normal braking pressure at higher speeds This will also enhance the grip of the brake pads Be very careful not to endanger other road users when you apply the brakes Refer to the description of the Brake Assist System BAS gt page 74 If the parking brake is released and the brake warning lamp in the instrument clus ter stays on the brake fluid level in the res ervoir is too low Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid in the res ervoir Have the brake system inspected by quali fied technicians immediately Contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Center All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by qualified technicians only Contact your authorized Mercedes Benz Center Install only brake pads and brake fluid rec ommended by Mercedes Benz A If other than recommended brake pads are installed or other than recommended brake fluid is used the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired This could result in an accident Warning When driving down long and steep grades relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine
258. ood terminal in front of discharged battery Negative terminal of charged battery Negative under hood terminal in front of discharged battery gt Connect positive terminal of the charged battery with positive under hood terminal in front of the dis charged battery with the jumper ca bles Clamp cable to charged battery Q first Q Positive terminal of charged battery gt Practical hints Jump starting Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery and run at idle speed Connect negative terminal of the charged battery with negative under hood terminal in front of the dis charged battery with the jumper ca bles Clamp cable to charged battery first Start the engine of the disabled vehi cle Now you can turn on the electrical con sumers Do not turn on the lights under any circumstances Practical hints Jump starting gt Remove the jumper cables first from negative terminals and and then from positive terminals Q and You can now turn on the lights gt Have the battery checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Vehicles with automatic transmission Do not tow start the vehicle Y Towing the vehicle Mercedes Benz recommends that the vehi cle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift dolly equipment This method is pref erable to other types of towing Use flatbed or wheel lift dolly e
259. ood view of the road and traffic condi tions AN In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks Warning Electrolyte has an irritating effect Do not al low the liquid to come into contact with eyes skin clothing or respiratory system In case it does immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary Getting started Adjusting Interior rear view mirror gt Manually adjust the interior rear view mirror For more information see Rear view mir rors gt page 146 Getting started Adjusting Exterior rear view mirrors Warning A Exercise care when using the passenger The buttons are located above the exterior i lamp switch The memory function gt page 95 lets you store the setting for the exterior rear view mirrors together with the set tings for the steering wheel and seat side exterior rear view mirror The mirror positions surface is convex outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view Objects in mirror H are closer than they appear Check your in side rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes If an exterior rear view mirror was forc ibly pushed forward hit from the rear or forcibly pushed backward hit from the front reposition it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into place The mirror housing is now properly po sitioned and you c
260. or C 320 Rim light alloy 4 5Bx15H2 4 5 Bx 16 H2 Wheel offset 0 47 in 12 mm 0 47 in 12 mm Collapsible Tire 165 15 89P 165 70 16 92P 1 Must not be used with snow chains Technical data Electrical system V Electrical system 14V 120A 12 V 1 1 kW 12V 100 Ah Bosch F 6 MPP 332 0 031 in 0 8 mm 18 22 lb ft 25 30 Nm ce N N Technical data Main Dimensions Vv Main Dimensions Model Overall vehicle length Overall vehicle width Overall vehicle height Wheelbase Track front Track rear C 230 Kompressor C 320 171 0 in 4345 mm 68 0 in 1728 mm 55 4 in 1406 mm 106 9 in 2715 mm 58 8 in 1493 mm 57 6 in 1464 mm Technical data Weights V Weights Roof load max 220 Ib 100 kg Trunk load max 220 Ib 100 kg Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Vv Fuels coolants lubricants etc Capacities Vehicle components and their respective Mercedes Benz Please refer to the Facto lubricants must match Therefore use only ry Approved Service Products pamphlet or brands tested and approved by inquire at your Mercedes Benz Center Model Capacity Fuels coolants lubricants etc Engine with oil filter C 230 Kompressor 5 8 US qt 5 5 I approved engine oils C 320 7 9 US qt 7 5 I Automatic transmission 8 5 US qt 8 0 MB Automatic Transmission Oil Manual transmission 1 3 US qt 1 2 I MB Manual Transmission Oil Rear axle 1 2 US qt 1 1 1 Hypoid gear o
261. or un locked Pushing the lock button down on an individual door from inside will lock that door Memory function Used to store three individual seat steering wheel and mirror positions for each SmartKey Menu The control system displays are ar ranged in menus Each menu contains a number of commands for particular systems In the Audio menu for exam ple you will find the commands Select radio station or Operate CD player Using commands you can directly change the settings for your vehicle MON Motor Octane Number The Motor Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized meth od It is an indication of a gasoline s ability to resist undesired detonation knocking The average of both the MON Motor Octane Number and gt RON Research Octane Number is posted at the pump also known as AN TI KNOCK INDEX Technical terms Multifunction display Display field in the instrument cluster used to present information provided by the control system Multifunction steering wheel Steering wheel with buttons for operat ing the control system Overspeed range Engine speeds within the red marking of the tachometer dial Avoid this en gine speed range as it may result in se rious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Technical terms Power train Collective term designating all compo nents used to generate and transmit motive power to the drive axles
262. oss Do not blend any specific fuel additives with fuel This only results in unnecessary cost and may be harmful to engine opera tion Damage or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending specific fuel additives are not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Flexible Fuel Vehicles Flexible Fuel Vehicles are identified by a la bel reading Premium gasoline or E85 only on fuel filler flap These vehicles are designed to operate on premium unleaded gasoline or Ethanol fuel E85 or on any mixture of these two Ethanol fuel E85 is a mixture of approxi mately 85 Ethanol and 15 unleaded gas oline Warning A Ethanol fuel E85 and its fumes are highly flammable poisonous and burn easily Etha nol fuel can cause serious injuries if ignited or if you come into contact with it or inhale fumes of it Avoid inhalation of Ethanol fumes and skin contact with Ethanol Extin guish all open flames before fueling Never smoke or create sparks close to Ethanol Switching fuels For best performance and driveability it is recommended to use either one or the oth er fuel A refueling pattern that alternates between the two different fuels should be avoided if possible When switching fuels make sure e Fuel level is below half full e Fuel level is above reserve reserve warning lamp is not lit e Amount of added fuel is more than 5 gallons 20 liters e Ignition is off during refill
263. ossible solution gt Stop immediately and check the poly V belt If it is broken gt Do not continue to drive Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine Notify an authorized Mercedes Benz Center If it is intact gt Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message displayed Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Observe the coolant temperature display Have the fan replaced as soon as possible 273 Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message CRUISE CONTROL DRIVE TO WORKSHOP VISIT WORKSHOP DISPLAY MALFUNCTION VISIT WORKSHOP DISPLAY MALFUNCTION DOOR OPEN Possible cause Cruise control is malfunctioning The instrument cluster display is malfunctioning The displays for several systems have malfunctioned Some systems them selves may also have malfunctioned Certain electronic systems are unable to relay information to the control system The following systems may have failed e Coolant temperature display e Tachometer e Cruise control display You are attempting to drive with one or more doors open Possible solution gt gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Continue driving with added caution Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Have the electronic s
264. ows gt c Press switch C or 2 to the resistance point The corresponding window will move downwards until you release the switch losing the windows gt Pull switch or to the resistance point The corresponding window will move upwards until you release the switch AN If you pull and hold the switch up when clos ing the window and upward movement of the window is blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms hands fin gers etc the automatic reversal will not op erate Warning Fully opening the windows Express open gt Press switch C or past the resis tance point and release The corresponding window opens com pletely Fully closing the windows Express close gt Pull switch Q or past the resis tance point and release The corresponding window closes com pletely If the upward movement of the window is blocked during the closing proce dure the window will stop and open slightly Remove the obstruction pull the switch again past the resistance point and release Controls in detail Power windows If the window still does not close when there is no obstruction then pull and hold the switch again The side window will then close without the obstruction sensor function A Warning Driver s door only If within five seconds you again pull the switch past the resistance point and re lease the automatic reversal will
265. oximate ly 13 5 m every second The control system relays information to the multifunction display Controls in detail Control system Multifunction display 1498 B 8 Miles Q 1026753 om oF 10 30a 32 2215 31 Outside temperature Main odometer Trip odometer Automatic transmission program mode Current gear selector lever position Digital clock Controls in detail Control system Multifunction steering wheel The displays in the multifunction display and the settings in the control system are controlled by the buttons on the multifunc tion steering wheel Multifunction display in the speed ometer Operating the control system Selecting the submenu or setting the volume E down to decrease up to increase Telephone to take a call to end a call Menu systems for next menu for previous menu Moving within a menu E for next display for previous display Pressing any of the buttons on the multi function steering wheel will alter what is shown in the multifunction display The information available in the multifunc tion display is arranged in menus each containing a number of functions or sub menus The individual functions are then found within the relevant menu radio or CD op erations under AUDIO for example These functions serve to call up relevant informa tion or to customize the settings for your vehicle It is helpful t
266. peed Cancel cruise control Resume at last set speed Setting current speed gt Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed gt Briefly lift or depress 2 the cruise control lever The current speed is set gt Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Cruise control is activated i On uphill or downhill grades cruise control may not be able to maintain the set speed Once the grade eases the set speed will be resumed Canceling cruise control There are several ways to cancel cruise control gt Step on the brake pedal or gt Briefly push the cruise control lever to position Cruise control will be canceled The last speed set will be stored for later use Controls in detail Driving systems Moving gear selector lever to position N while driving also cancels cruise control However the gear se lector lever should not be moved to position N while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skid ding e g on icy roads i Vehicles with manual transmission The set cruise controlled speed is switched off when declutching exceeds four seconds during downshifting a gear e The last stored speed is canceled when you turn off the engine Controls in detail Driving systems Setting a higher speed gt Lift the cruise control lever to position Q and hold it up until the de sired speed is reached gt Release the cruise control lever
267. ppears gt Press and hold the reset button on the instrument cluster gt page 22 until the trip odometer is reset Tachometer The red marking on the tachometer de notes excessive engine speed Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds as it may result in serious en gine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty To help protect the engine the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking Controls in detail Instrument cluster Outside temperature indicator Warning A The outside temperature indicator is not de signed to serve as an ice warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose Indicated temperatures just above the freez ing point do not guarantee that the road sur face is free of ice The road may still be icy especially in wooded areas or on bridges The outside temperature is displayed in the instrument cluster gt page 22 For in formation how to select the unit of the dis played temperature i e degrees Celsius C or degrees Fahrenheit F see Se lecting temperature display mode gt page 123 107 Controls in detail Instrument cluster The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper area Due to its location the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving This means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by com parison
268. preliminary information avail able at time of printing At time of printing no date for availabil ity of optional equipment required for satellite radio operation had been set Contact your authorized Mecedes Benz Center for details and availability for your vehicle Satellite radio service may be unavail able or interrupted from time to time for a variety of reasons such as envi ronmental or topographic conditions and other things we can t control Ser vice might also not be available in cer tain places e g in tunnels parking garages or within or next to buildings or near other technologies Sirius Satellite Radio provides 100 chan nels of digital quality radio among others music sports news and entertainment free of commercials Sirius Satellite Radio uses a fleet of high power satellites to broadcast 24 hours per day coast to coast This diverse satellite delivered program ming is available for a monthly subscrip tion fee For more information call the Sirius ser vice or contact www siriusradio com Program categories The channels are categorized The catego ries allow you to tune to stations broad casting a certain type of program PTY mode gt page 171 Starting satellite radio SAT gt Start radio mode If the radio was in SAT radio mode be fore being turned off or changed to an other operating mode the last SAT channel selected is called up or gt Press the SAT key W
269. quip ment with SmartKey in starter switch turned to position 0 Do not tow with sling type equipment Towing with sling type equipment over bumpy roads will damage radiator and supports To prevent damage during transport do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts Switch off the tow away alarm gt page 79 and deactivate the auto matic central locking gt page 129 When circumstances do not permit the recommended towing methods the vehi cle may be towed with all wheels on the ground or front wheels raised only so far as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recommended towing methods can be employed Vehicles with automatic transmission Do not tow start the vehicle Practical hints Towing the vehicle Ba If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised the engine must be shut off SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 Otherwise the ESP will immedi ately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground the gear selector lever must be in position N manual trans mission gears disengaged and the SmartKey must be in starter switch position 2 When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground or the front axle raised the vehicle may be towed only for dis tances up to 30 miles 50 km and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph 50 km h Practical hints Towing the vehicle 5
270. r Follow the instructions on container i Only use acid free cleaning materials Acid may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat Instrument cluster Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution Wipe with a cloth moist ened in lukewarm solution Do not use scouring agents Steering wheel and gear selector lever Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes Benz approved Leather Care Cup holder Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution Wipe with a cloth moist ened in lukewarm solution Do not use scouring agents Hard plastic trim items Pour Mercedes Benz approved Interior Care onto soft lint free cloth and apply with light pressure Headliner and rear window shelf Clean with soft bristle brush or use a dry shampoo cleaner in case of excessive dirt Operation Vehicle care Seat belts The webbing must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents Use only clear lukewarm water and soap Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above 176 F 80 C or in direct sunlight A Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection Warning Operation Vehicle care Upholstery Plastic and rubber parts Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing Do not use oil or wax on these parts clothi
271. r blades 300 Cup holder 201 ERARA 8 aa Instrument cluster 22 105 343 Glove box 200 amp Global unlocking 83 Cleaning 255 Parcel net in Individual setting 83 Coolant temperature indicator 106 front passenger footwell 203 Lossof 84 amp Illumination 105 Storage compartment in Positions in starter switch 31 Lamps in 261 262 front of armrest 201 109 Remote controls 82 PA EERE NI Restoring to factory setting 83 Starting the engine 45 Unlocking with 30 Kickdown 145 343 Kilometers miles in speedometer 124 Km h or mphin speedometer 124 L Labels identification 322 Lamp bulbs exterior 293 Lamps Foglamps_ 101 Lamps exterior Front 293 Light sensor 278 Messages in display 277 279 Rear 294 Lamps indicator and warning ABS 258 Airbag Off 61 Battery SmartKey 83 Brakes 259 CHECK ENGINE 260 Coolant 271 Engine diagnostics 260 262 ESP 261 Fuel reserve 262 Instrument cluster 261 262 Seat belts 262 Service indicator 249 SRS 57 Turn signals 23 Language Multifunction display 124 Setting 124 LATCH child seat mounts 70 Folding back 70 Layout of poly V belt drive 323 Leather upholstery Cleaning 256 License plate lamps Messages in display 278 Replacing bulbs 294 299 Light alloy wheels Cleaning 254 Technical data 326 Light sensor 278 Lighter see Cigarette lighter 204 Lighting 98 Automatic headlamp mode 99 Combination switch 102 Daytime running lamp mode 100 Exterior lamp switch 98 Fog lamps 101 Front
272. r lamp on the button comes on Reactivating gt Set the air volume control gt page 151 to any speed Controls in detail Climate control Air conditioning The air conditioning is operational while the engine is running and cools the interior air to the temperature set by the operator i Condensation may drip out from under neath the vehicle This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction Activating Moist air can fog up the windows You can dehumidify the air with the air condition ing gt Press again gt page 151 The indicator lamp on the button goes out The air conditioning system uses the refrig erant R134a This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer Deactivating It is possible to deactivate the air condi tioning cooling function of the climate control system The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified gt Press button gt page 151 The indicator lamp on the button comes on If the air conditioning cannot be turned on again this indicates that the air con ditioning system is losing refrigerant The compressor has turned itself off Have the air conditioning system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Ventilated storage compartment The front center console storage compart ment has its own air vent that allows for cooling ventilation when the climate con trol system is activated
273. r opening the hood Hood release gt Pull lever downwards The hood is unlocked and handle will extend out of the radiator grille Warning A If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment or if the coolant tem perature display indicates that the engine is overheated do not open the hood Move away from vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled If necessary call the fire department Warning VAN The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components ignition coils spark plug sockets diagnos tic socket of the ignition system e with the engine running e while starting the engine e if ignition is on and the engine is turned manually Closing Warning VAN Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone gt Let the hood drop from a height of ap proximately 1 ft 30 cm The hood will lock audibly gt Check to make sure the hood is fully closed If you can raise the hood at a point above the headlamps then it is not properly closed Open it again and let it drop with somewhat greater force Operation Engine compartment Engine oil The amount of oil your engine needs will depend on a number of factors including driving style Higher oil consumption can occur when e the vehicle is new e the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds
274. r or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or mal functions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts During the pe riod of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles approx 29 000 km on the odometer of the vehicle whichever occurs first a reasonable number of repair at tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following oc curs 1 the same substantial defect or mal function results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven that de fect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times and you have directly notified Mercedes Benz USA LLC in writing of the need for its repair 2 the same substantial defect or mal function of a less serious nature than category 1 has been subject to repair four or more times and you have direct ly notified us in writing of the need for its repair or Introduction Operator s Manual 3 the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different sub stantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calender days Written notification should be sent to us not a dealer at Mercedes Benz USA LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale NJ 07645 0350 Introduction Operator s Manual Maintenance
275. rear Have the LEDs replaced as soon as CHECK LIGHT view mirror is malfunctioning This mes possible sage will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working TURN SIG MIRROR R The right turn signal in the exterior rear Have the LEDs replaced as soon as CHECK LIGHT view mirror is malfunctioning This mes possible sage will only appear if all light emitting diodes have stopped working Display symbol Display message DRIV FAST FR FAST EAT RIV Ga Gy Sl UNR CLOS SUNR LOSE ER S SEAT BELT EN SEAT BELT PASS SEAT BELT EN SEAT BELT BEIS YSE E TO WORKSHOP OOF OOF Possible cause The display reminds you to fasten the seat belt The display reminds you and your passengers to fasten seat belts The seat belt system is malfunctioning You have opened the driver s door with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch and the sliding pop up roof open You have opened the driver s door with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch and the sliding pop up roof open Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Fasten the seat belts gt Fasten the seat belts p gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Close the sliding pop up roof gt page 190 Close the sliding pop up roof gt page 190 Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Displ
276. replacing rims use only genuine Mercedes Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type Failure to do so can re sult in the bolts loosening and possibly an accident Retreaded tires are not tested or recom mended by Mercedes Benz since previous damage cannot always be recognized on retreads Mercedes Benz can therefore not assure the operating safety of the vehi cle when such tires are used See your authorized Mercedes Benz Cen ter for information on tested and recom mended rims and tires for summer and winter operation Important guidelines Use only sets of tires and rims of the same type and make Tires must be of the correct size for the rim Break in new tires for approximately 60 miles 100 km at moderate speeds Regularly check the tires and rims for damage Dented or bent rims can cause tire pressure loss and damage to the tire beads If vehicle is heavily loaded check tire pressure and correct as required Do not allow your tires to wear down too far Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under g in 3 mm When replacing individual tires you should mount new tires on the front wheels first on vehicles with same sized wheels all around Life of tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven A Tires and spare tire should be replaced a
277. riority e Roadside assistance Third priority e Information Fourth priority Should a higher priority call be initiated while you are connected an upgrade al ternating tone will be heard and the ap propriate indicator lamp will flash If certain information such as vehicle identi fication number or customer information is not available the operator may need to re transmit During this time you will hear a beep and voice contact will be interrupted Voice contact will resume once the retransmis sion is completed Once a call is conclud ed a beep will be heard and the respective indicator lamp will stop flashing The CO MAND system operation will resume If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset contact the Response Center at 1 800 756 9018 in the USA or 1 888 923 8367 in Canada or Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance at 1 800 FOR MERCedes 1 800 367 6372 in the USA or Customer Service at 1 800 387 0100 in Canada i The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until the call is conclud ed Calls can only be terminated by a Response Center or Customer Assis tance Center representative except Roadside Assistance and Information calls which can also be terminated by pressing button on the multifunc tion steering wheel Controls in detail Useful features The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature i Remote door
278. rn the front wheel towards the road curb Do not park this vehicle in areas where com bustible materials such as grass hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire 137 Controls in detail Manual transmission Hi Shifting into reverse Downshifting gears leading to overrev ving the engine can result in engine damage that is not covered by the gt Pull gearshift lever up and shift in Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty R reverse gt Stop the vehicle completely Do not exceed the engine speed limits gt page 324 Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by using the clutch pedal The clutch may be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warran ty Y Automatic transmission For more information on driving with an au tomatic transmission see Automatic transmission gt page 45 Your vehicle s transmission adapts its gear shifting process to your individual driving style by continually adjusting the shift points up or down These shift point adjust ments are performed based on current operating and driving conditions If the operating conditions change the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting its gear shift program i During the brief warm up transmission upshifting is delayed This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperature The automatic
279. rt the SmartKey in the starter oo until itstops and turnt to switch 288 Unlocking the trunk lid If you are unable to unlock the trunk lid Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency Fold backrest forward Remove cover 1 from the trim on the Locking the vehicle If you are unable to lock the vehicle with trunk lid the SmartKey lock it with the mechanical with the SmartKey you can use the emer gency release on the inside of the trunk lid to unlock it Cover Release lever Rear bench seat backrest gt Push release lever all the way to the key as follows right gt Close the passenger door and the trunk Open the trunk lid lid H gt Press the central locking switch in the The trunk lid swings open upwards au tomatically Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance A mini mum height clearance of 6 92 ft 2 11 m is required to open the trunk lid cockpit gt page 88 Check to see whether the locking knob on the passenger door is down If nec essary push it down manually Lock the driver s door with the me chanical key Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency Changing batteries in the SmartKey If the batteries in the SmartKey are dis charged the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked It is recommended to have the batteries replaced at an autho rized Mercedes Benz Center A Keep the batteries out of
280. rtain frontal front airbags and side side im pact and window curtain airbags im pacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds gt D gt D Safety and Security Occupant safety Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm against your neck or off your shoul der In a crash your body would move too far forward That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen which could se verely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing such as eyeglasses pens keys etc as these might cause injuries Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdo men If the belt is positioned across your abdomen it could cause serious injuries in a crash Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another per son or other objects Belts should not be worn twisted In a crash you wouldn t have the full width of the belt to manage impact forces The twisted belt against your body could cause injuries Pregnant women should also use a lap shoulder belt The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pres sure on the abdomen Never place your feet on the instrument panel or on the seat Always keep both feet on the floor in front
281. s serious or fatal injury will result t 1 According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seat ing positions Infants and small children must ride in back seats and be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system which is properly secured with the vehicle s seat belt and top tether strap or secured via lower anchors and top tether strap fully in accordance with the child seat manufactur er s instructions 1 BabySmart is a trademark of Siemens Automo tive Corp Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant During an accident they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt A child s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Children too big for child restraint systems must ride in back seats using regular seat belts Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder not face or neck A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 Ibs until they reach a height where a lap shoulder belt fits properly without a booster When the child restraint is not in use re move it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an a
282. s on air pump label Remove the valve cap from valve Screw the air hose 2 on to the tire valve Insert electrical plug into vehicle cigarette lighter socket To switch on the air pump turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 gt page 31 Operate air pump until the pressure gauge displays 36 psi 2 5 bar This takes about five minutes for the space tire The air hose 2 and the union nut 3 can become hot during in flation Do not operate the electric air pump longer than eight minutes without in terruption Otherwise it may overheat You may operate the air pump again af ter it has cooled off To switch off the air pump turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position O gt page 31 If the tire pressure is above 36 psi 2 5 bar release excess tire pressure using the vent screw Practical hints Flat tire Warning VAN Follow recommended inflation pressures Do not overinflate tires Overinflated tires can result in sudden deflation blowout be cause they are more likely to become punc tured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Do not underinflate tires Underinfalted tires wear unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being overheated Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified vehicle capacity weight as indicat ed by the label on the driver s door latch post Overloading the tires can overheat
283. s this could result in malfunctions The panorama sliding pop up roof can be opened or closed manually should the climate control gt page 150 gt Press the switch again to open it com gt Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 pletely i The panorama sliding pop up roof can an electrical malfunction occur gt page 292 Opening and closing the panorama not be closed automatically sliding pop up roof Stopping the panorama gt To open close raise or lower the pan oe sliding pop up roof orama sliding pop up roof move the switch to the resistance point inthe re Move the switch in any direction quired direction to Release the switch when the roof has reached the desired position Controls in detail Panorama sliding pop up roof Opening the panorama sliding pop up roof with the SmartKey The power windows gt page 186 will also be opened or closed when you operate the panorama sliding pop up roof with the SmartKey Warning VAN Never operate the windows or panorama sliding pop up roof if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure In the event that the procedure causes po tential danger the procedure can be imme diately halted by releasing the button on the SmartKey To reverse direction of move ment press for opening or for closing gt Aim transmitter eye at the driver s door handle Openin
284. sage ADD 1 0 Qt ENGINE When this occurs the warning will first T OIL WHEN NEXT REFUELING Canada 1 0 come on intermittently and then stay on if Liter appears while the engine is running the oil level drops further and at operating temperature the engine The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored Extended driving with Visually check for oil leaks If no obvious oil the symbol displayed could result in ol evs has dropper approximately the leaks are noted drive to the nearest ser serious engine damage that is not i i i vice station where the engine oil should be covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited topped to the full mark on the dipstick Warranty with an approved oil 276 Display symbol Display message RESERVE FUEL G CHECK GAS CAP S REMOVE KEY EPLACE KEY VISIT WORKSHO 0 TO GAS STATION EE OPERATOR S MANUAL HOOD OPEN You are driving with the hood open RE DRIVE TO WORKSHOP 3RD BRAKE LIGHT CH AU ECK LIGHT TOM LIGHT ON REMOVE KEY BRAKE LIGHT DRIVE TO WORKSHOP BRAKE LIGHT L CHECK LIGHT BRAKE LIGHT R CHECK LIGHT DISPLAY MALFU CTION P Possible cause The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark The fuel cap is not closed tightly You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey No additional code available for SmartKey The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning SmartKey in starter switch posi
285. sage NAVI in the display e Ifthe navigation system is switched off the message NAVI OFF is shown in the display e Ifthe navigation system is on the mes sage NAVI ACTIVE is shown in the dis play Please refer to the COMAND manual for instructions on how to activate the route guidance system Malfunction memory menu Use the malfunction memory menu to scan malfunction and warning messages that may be stored in the system What infor mation is shown in the display depends on whether malfunctions have actually oc curred A Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and are inten tionally not very detailed The malfunction and warning messages are simply a remind er with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the owner s and or driver s responsibility to maintain the vehicle s operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes Benz Center to address the malfunction and warning messages gt page 264 Warning Controls in detail Control system gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the malfunction message memory in the display No malfunction messages If no malfunctions have occurred the mes sage in the display is NO MALFUNCTION 117 Controls in detail Control system Malfunctions have occurred Should any malfunctions occ
286. seat may come loose during an accident which could result in serious injury or death to your child Damaged or impact damaged child seats or child seat anchors must be replaced Do not leave children unattended in the ve hicle even if the children are secured in a child restraint system Safety and Security Occupant safety Safety and Security Panic alarm Y Panic alarm An audible alarm and flashing exterior Activating i lamps will operate for approximately F aai Thi or operation in the USA only This de 21 2 minutes gt Press and hold button for at least vice complies with Part 15 of the one second FCC Rules Operation is subject to the followi itions Deactivating ollowing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful gt Press button again interference and gt Insert SmartKey in starter switch 2 this device must accept any inter ference received including interfer ence that may cause undesired operation P80 35 2110 31 Any unauthorized modification to this butt s f ia device could void the user s authority i to operate the equipment Canada only Only vehicles equipped with an anti theft alarm system have SmartKeys with integrated panic button Q V Driving safety systems In this section you will find informations on the following driving safety systems e ABS Antilock Brake System e BAS Brake Assist System e ESP Electronic Stabilit
287. sh affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary A Exercise care when using the passenger side exterior rear view mirror The mirror surface is convex outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view Objects in mirror are closer than they appear Check your in side rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Warning Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can be completely removed only while in the liquid state by applying plenty of water Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position Follow these steps to activate the mirror parking position so that the passen ger side exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward to the stored positions gt Make sure you stored a parking posi tion for the passenger side exterior rear view mirror gt page 97 Make sure the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING function found under the CON VENTENCE submenu in the control sys tem is switched to ON gt page 132 Switch on ignition Press button 2 for the passenger side exterior rear view mirror Place the gear selector lever in reverse gear R The passenger side exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward to the stored position Controls in detail Good visibility Driver s side exterior rear view mirror button Passenger side exterior rear view mirror button The exterior rear view mirror returns to its pr
288. should not be left in inter mittent setting as the wipers will wipe the windshield once every time the en gine is started Dust that accumulates on the windshield might scratch the glass and or damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry wind shield Getting started Driving Single wipe gt Press switch briefly in the direction of arrow Q The windshield wipers wipe one time without washer fluid Wiping with windshield washer fluid gt Push switch in the direction of arrow Q past the resistance point The windshield wiper operates with washer fluid For information on filling up the washer reservoir see Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system gt page 243 If anything blocks the windshield wip ers leaves snow etc switch them off immediately e For safety reasons withdraw SmartKey from starter switch be fore attempting to remove any blockage e Remove blockage e Turn the windshield wipers on again If windshield wipers fail to function at all in switch position l e set the combination switch to the next highest wiper speed e have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes Benz Center Problems while driving The engine runs erratically and misfires e An ignition cable may be damaged e The engine electronics may not be op erating properly e Unburned gasoline may have entered the catalytic converter and damaged it Giv
289. somewhat harder Never exceed the max values or inflate tires below the min values listed in the fuel filler flap Operation Tires and wheels Tire pressure changes by approximately 1 5 psi 0 1 bar per 18 F 10 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure where the temperature is different from the outside temperature Tire temperature and tire pressure are also increased while driving depending on the driving speed and the tire load A Follow recommended inflation pressures Warning Do not overinflate tires Overinflating tires can result in sudden deflation blowout be cause they are more likely to become punc tured or damaged by road debris potholes etc Do not underinflate tires Underinflated tires wear unevenly adversely affect handling and fuel economy and are more likely to fail from being overheated Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified vehicle capacity weight as indicat ed by the label on the pillar in the driver s door opening Overloading the tires can overheat them possibly causing a blowout Check the spare tire periodically for condi tion and inflation Spare tires will age and become worn over time even if never used and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary Rotating wheels A Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are of the same size Warning On vehicles with the same wheel size all around w
290. sound reproduction of cassettes recorded using Dolby B NR the Dolby NR system should be switched on The Dolby NR function should be switched off when playing cassettes not recorded with Dolby B NR 1 DOLBY and the double D symbol pal are trade marks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpora tion The Dolby noise reduction system is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation Switching on gt Press the NR key NR is highlighted in the display Switching off gt Press the NR key The highlighted NR in the display disap pears Controls in detail Audio system CD changer operation General notes Should excessively high temperatures oc cur while in CD mode CD TEMP HIGH will appear on the display and the CD will be muted The unit will then switch back to the last operating mode used until the tem perature has decreased to a safe operating level CD 5 TEP RPT LOH AD T P82 60 4066 31 Should excessively low temperatures oc cur while in CD mode CD TEMP LOW will ap pear on the display but the CD will continue to play Co RDM Handle CDs carefully to prevent interfer ence during playback Avoid fingerprints and dust on CDs Do not write on CDs or apply any labels or other material to them 175 Controls in detail Audio system Use only original CDs Using copied CDs may create problems during playback Clean CDs from time to time with
291. stem without performing the proper service as called for by the FSS will cause the FSS to incorrectly determine the next service interval which will result in en gine damage not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Y Vehicle care Cleaning and care of the vehicle A Many cleaning products can be hazardous Some are poisonous others are flammable Always follow the instructions on the partic ular container Always open your vehicle s doors or windows when cleaning the inside Warning Never use fluids or solvents that are not de signed for cleaning your vehicle While in operation even while parked your vehicle is subjected to varying external in fluences which if gone unchecked can at tack the paintwork as well as the underbody and cause lasting damage Such damage is caused not only by ex treme and varying climatic conditions but also by e Air pollution e Road salt e Tar e Gravel and stone chipping To avoid paint damage you should imme diately remove e Grease and oil e Fuel e Coolant e Brake fluid e Bird droppings e Insects e Tree resins etc Frequent washing reduces and or elimi nates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences Operation Vehicle care More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions e near the ocean e in industrial areas smoke exhaust emissions e during winter operation You should che
292. stems 73 Through standing water 229 Driving abroad 230 Driving instructions 223 Driving off 225 Driving safety systems ABS 73 BAS 74 ESP 75 Driving systems 194 Cruise control 194 Driving safety systems 73 E Easy entry exit feature 89 Activating 130 Interrupting movement 89 130 Electrical fuses 317 Electrical system Technical data 327 Electronic Stability Program see ESP 23 75 342 Emergency call system 206 Emergency calls Initiating an emergency call 209 Telephone 184 With Tele Aid 208 Emergency operation Limp Home Mode 145 Emergency operations Closing sliding pop up roof 292 Locking the vehicle 289 Opening sliding pop up roof 292 Remote door unlock 213 Unlocking the vehicle 288 Emergency release Trunk lid 86 Emergency tensioning device see ETD 64 342 Emission control 231 Emission control label 322 Ending A call telephone 135 Engine Compartment 236 Message in display 260 Starting with automatic transmission 45 Starting with manual transmission 44 Starting with the key 45 Technical data 324 Turning off with the key 53 Engine cleaning 253 Engine compartment 236 Fuse boxin 317 Hood 236 Engine malfunction indicator lamp 23 260 Engine number 342 Engine oil 237 332 Adding 239 Additives 332 Checking level 237 Consumption 237 Display messages 275 Fillerneck 240 Messages in display 238 276 Viscosity 342 Engine oil level see Oil level 235 ESP 23 75 342 Messages in display 266 Switching off
293. straints gt Allow handle to reengage gt Check for proper engagement before Seat backrest tilt Manual seat adjustment driving gt Turn handwheel forward or back s Adjust seat to a comfortable seating posi ward until your arms are slightly angled tion that still allows you to reach the accel when holding the steering wheel erator brake pedal safely The position should be as far rearward as possible Seat height consistent with ability to properly operate Pull handle up to raise seat cushion controls gt Push handle down to lower seat i cushion When moving the seats be sure that there are no items in the footwell or be hind the seats Otherwise you could damage the seats Backrest tilt Seat height Seat cushion tilt Seat fore and aft adjustment Getting started Adjusting Head restraint height Lowering Head restraint tilt gt To lower the head restraint push re lease button and press down on the head restraint Warning A For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints a Adjust head restraint so that the head re J Release button straint supports the back of the head at eye Manually adjust the angle of the head re Raising level This will reduce the potential for injury straint to the head and neck in the event of an ac gt Manually adjust the height of the head cident or similar situation restraint by pulling it upwar
294. strip Warning Use only roof racks approved by Mercedes Benz for your vehicle model to avoid damage to the vehicle Follow manu facturer s installation instructions Luggage cover Removal gt Take off securing straps Q gt Pull cover towards rear 2 Installation gt Place cover into holder p gt Attach securing straps to trunk lid Do not place anything on the luggage cover below the rear window Controls in detail Loading Split rear bench seat To expand the cargo area you can fold down the left and right rear seat backrests The two sections can be folded down sep arately A When expanding the luggage compartment always fold the seat cushions fully forward Warning Unless you are transporting cargo the back rests must remain properly locked in the up right position In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle 197 Controls in detail Loading gt Pull release lever gt Fold backrest forward Folding the backrest forward gt Fold backrest rearward until it engag es gt Fold seat cushion rearward until it locks into position If the backrest is not locked into position a red indicator Q will be visible aA gt Pull release handle Q gt Check for secure locki
295. t or call the Mercedes Benz Customer Assistance Cen ter in the USA at 1 800 FOR MER Cedes or Customer Service in Canada at 1 800 387 0100 Introduction Operator s Manual Operating your vehicle outside the USA Certain Mercedes Benz models are avail or Canada able for delivery in Europe under our Euro pean Delivery Program For details consult If you plan to operate your vehicle in for your authorized Mercedes Benz Center or eign countries please be aware that write to e service facilities or replacement parts In the USA il may not be readily available Nercedes Benz USA LLC e unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat European Delivery Department alytic converters may not be available One Mercedes Drive the use of leaded fuels will damage the Montvale NJ 07645 0350 catalysts y In Canada e gasoline may have a considerably low er octane rating and improper fuel can cause engine damage Mercedes Benz Canada Inc European Delivery Department 849 Eglinton Avenue East Toronto Ontario M4G 2L5 Introduction Where to find it VY Where to find it This Operator s Manual is designed to pro vide comprehensive support information for you the vehicle operator Each section has its own reference color so you can find information quickly IN At a glance Here you will find an overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver s seat E Getting started Here you w
296. t page 334 Use only premium unleaded meeting ASTM standard D 439 e The octane number posted at the pump must be 91 min It is an average of both the Research R octane num ber and the Motor M octane number R M 2 This is also known as the ANTI KNOCK INDEX Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol IPA IBA and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed 10 MTBE must not exceed 15 The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3 plus additional cosolvents Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not allowed Gasohol which contains 10 ethanol and 90 unleaded gasoline can be used These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements such as resistance to spark knock boiling range vapor pressure etc Technical data Fuels coolants lubricants etc Gasoline additives A major concern among engine manufac turers is carbon build up caused by gaso line Mercedes Benz recommends only the use of quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build up of carbon depos its After an extended period of using fuels without such additives carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area leading to en gine performance problems such as e Warm up hesitation e Unstable idle e Knocking pinging e Misfire e Power l
297. tem Such signal interference may cause the PASS AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp not to come on during self test or be continuously lit indicating that the system is not function ing Installation of infant and child restraint systems P91 22 2094 31 Anchorage rings are located on the back side of the rear backrests and on the floor behind rear seat Prior to installing a tether strap note the following steps gt Fold backrest forward Safety and Security Occupant safety gt Guide tether strap between head re straints and rear shelf Head restraint must be installed if re movable and positioned such that the top tether strap can pass freely be tween the head restraint and top of seat back Make sure the tether strap is not twist ed gt Fold backrest back until it locks in place Warning A Always lock backrest in its upright position when rear seat bench is occupied by pas sengers or the extended cargo area is not in use Check for secure locking by pushing and pulling on the backrest bb Safety and Security Occupant safety P91 40 2343 31 gt Fold up anchorage ring gt Securely fasten hook which is part of the tether strap to anchorage ring iJ For safety make sure the hook has at tached to the ring beyond the safety catch as illustrated Child seat anchors LATCH type gt Install child seat according to the man This vehicle is equipped w
298. tem are malfunctioning an authorized Mercedes Benz Center FUNCTION This display appears if button NOT AVAILABLE or on the multifunction steering wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped with a telephone This message will appear whenever the Close the trunk lid trunk lid is open WASHER FLUID The fluid level has dropped to gt Add washer fluid gt page 243 CHECK LEVEL about we of total reservoir capacity Practical hints Where will I find Y Where will I find 2 First aid kit The first aid kit is stored in the trunk be hind the left trim panel gt Turn handles 2 gt Remove the trim panel Q gt Loosen the securing strap gt Remove first aid kit Check expiration dates and contents for completeness at least once a year and replace missing expired items Spare wheel The spare wheel is located under the trunk floor Removing the spare wheel gt Lift trunk floor and engage handle in the upper edge of the trunk rf Spare wheel Storage tray with vehicle tool kit Mounting screw for spare wheel cover for vehicle tools gt Turn the mounting screw 8 counter clockwise gt Remove the spare wheel Q Storing the spare wheel Place spare wheel in wheel well Turn mounting screw 3 clockwise to its stop to secure the spare wheel Lower the trunk floor before closing the trunk lid Practical hints Where will I find
299. the up per left hand corner of the display e Retrieving a station from memory gt Press desired station button EEI to EJ Controls in detail Audio system Automatic station memory Autostore The Autostore memory function provides an additional memory level The station memory for manually stored stations is not overwritten e Calling up Autostore memory level gt Briefly press the AS key AS is highlighted in the display The radio finds the ten stations with the strongest signals These stations are stored on the station buttons J to QM in order of signal strength e Retrieving a station from memory gt Press desired station button I to EE e Leaving the Autostore memory level gt Press the AS key The highlighted AS in the display disappears 167 Controls in detail Audio system Weather band HE kH FM SAT gt Press the WB key x GUID P82 60 4060 31 The weather band station last selected is tuned in gt Select the desired weather band station with buttons QJ to EA If a station cannot be tuned in a scan is automatically started gt Press EXE or ERG button The next receivable weather band station is tuned in Satellite radio SAT USA only i Additional optional satellite radio equipment and a subscription to satel lite radio service provider is required for the satellite radio operation de scribed here Feature description is based on
300. threads damage to the vehicle Inflate the spare wheel tire using the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle gt Remove the wheel Practical hints Flat tire E To avoid paint damage place wheel flat against hub and hold it there while in stalling first wheel bolt Warning VAN Always replace wheel bolts that are dam aged or rusted Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts Damaged wheel hub threads should be re paired immediately Do not continue to drive under these circumstances Contact an au thorized Mercedes Benz Center or call Roadside Assistance Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off This could cause an accident Make sure to use the correct mounting bolts Warning VAN Use only genuine equipment Mercedes Benz wheel bolts Other wheel bolts may come loose Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the ve hicle is raised Otherwise the vehicle could tip over gt Unscrew the alignment bolt install last wheel bolt and tighten slightly Inflating the spare tire gt Take the electric air pump out of the trunk Warning VAN Observe instructions on air pump label P40 10 2534 31 Flap Air hose with pressure gauge and vent screw Union nut Electrical plug Please exercise appropriate caution Open flap Q on air pump Pull out electrical plug 4 and air hose with the pressure gauge 2 Observe instruction
301. ting will be switched on or off Setting night security illumination Exterior lamps delayed shut off Use the HEADLIGHTS DELAYED SHUT OFF function to set whether and for how long you would like the exterior lamps to illumi nate during darkness after all doors are closed When the delayed shut off feature is acti vated and the exterior lamp switch is in po sition R the following lamps will remain lit after you remove the SmartKey from the starter switch e Parking lamps e Tail lamps e License plate lamps e Front fog lamps i You can reactivate this function within ten minutes by opening a door If you do not open a door after remov ing the SmartKey the lamps will auto matically switch off after 60 seconds To activate night security illumination gt Select delayed shut off period see be low gt Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi tion Bag To select delayed shut off period gt Move the selection marker with the or E button to the LIGHT ING submenu gt Press button EAN or Beg repeatedly until you see this message in the dis play HEADLIGHTS DELAYED SHUT OFF The selection marker is on the current setting HEADLIGHTS DELAYED SHUT OFF Controls in detail Control system gt Press or J to select the de sired lamp on period You can select e 0 s the delayed shut off feature is deactivated e 15 s 30 s 45 sor60 s the delayed shut off feature is activat
302. tion 1 or 2 Brake lamp illumination is delayed or lamp is permanently on The left brake lamp is malfunctioning The right brake lamp is malfunctioning The display for the lamps or the systemis gt malfunctioning Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Refuel at the next gas station gt page 233 gt Check the fuel cap gt Close the hood gt page 236 gt Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch gt Change the SmartKey p gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible gt Remove SmartKey from the starter switch p gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible p gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible p gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution FRONT FOGLIGHT L The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning Replace the bulb as soon as possible CHECK LIGHT FRONT FOGLIGHT R The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible CHECK LIGHT REAR FOGLIGHT The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible CHECK LIGHT HIGH BEAM L The left high beam lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible CHECK LIGHT malf
303. trally locked the exterior lamps will flash and the alarm will sound as the trunk lid opens To cancel the alarm do one of the following e Press button or on the SmartKey e Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch Automatic central locking The doors and the trunk lid automatically lock when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h or more You can open a locked door from the in side Open door only when conditions are safe to do so Controls in detail Locking and unlocking i The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact ex ceeds a preset threshold The vehicle automatically locks when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph 15 km h or more You could therefore lock yourself out when the vehicle e is pushed or towed e is ona test stand For more information on towing the vehi cle see Towing the vehicle gt page 313 You can deactivate the automatic locking mode using the control system gt page 129 Controls in detail Locking and unlocking Locking and unlocking from the inside You can lock or unlock the doors and the trunk lid from inside using the central lock ing switch This can be useful for example if you want to lock the vehicle before start ing to drive The fuel filler flap will not be locked or un lo
304. ts Two different head restraint angle posi tions are available Head restraint tilt Placing head restraints upright gt Press the release button and tilt the head restraint to the desired position C Release button gt Press release button Q The head restraints will fold backward gt Pull the head restraint forward until it locks into position Removing and installing rear seat head restraints A For your protection drive only with properly positioned head restraints Warning Adjust head restraint so that the head re straint supports the back of the head at eye level This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an ac cident or similar situation Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints Head restraints are intend ed to help reduce injuries during an acci dent Do not interchange head restraints from front and rear seat Release button Removing rear seat head restraints gt Fold back head restraint gt page 92 gt Pull head restraint to its highest posi tion gt Press release button and pull out head restraint Installing rear seat head restraints gt Insert head restraint and push it down until it engages gt Press release button and adjust head restraint to desired position Controls in detail Seats Heated seats Both switches for the front seats are locat ed in the center console
305. ts side impact and head protection window curtain air bags which exceed preset thresholds Only during these types of impacts if of sufficient severity to meet the deploy ment tresholds will they provide their supplemental protection The driver and passengers should always wear their seat belts Otherwise it is not possible for airbags to provide their supplemental protection Safety and Security Occupant safety In cases of other frontal impacts angled impacts roll overs other side impacts rear collisions or other acci dents the airbags will not be activated The driver and passengers will then be protected by the fastened seat belts We caution you not to rely on the pres ence of the airbags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt Your vehicle was originally equipped with airbags that are designed to acti vate in certain impacts exceeding a preset threshold to reduce the poten tial and severity of injury It is important to your safety and that of your passen ger that you replace deployed airbags and repair any malfunctioning airbags to ensure that the vehicle will continue to provide supplement crash protec tion for occupants Safety and Security Occupant safety Safety guidelines for the seat belt emergency tensioning device and airbag Warning A e Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked
306. ts and chil dren see Children in the vehicle gt page 65 The EGE indicator lamp in the instrument cluster gt page 22 comes on e for about four seconds when you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 e for about four seconds when you start the engine by turning the SmartKey i The EY indicator lamp remains lit if the SmartKey is turned to position 2 and left there The indicator lamp will go out when you start the engine The EY indicator lamp goes out shortly after you start the engine This shows that the restraint systems are operational A malfunction in the system has been de tected if the E9 indicator lamp e fails to extinguish after approximately four seconds e does not come on at all e comes on after the engine was started or while driving For safety reasons we strongly recom mend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately to have the system checked For more information see Practical hints section gt page 262 Safety and Security Occupant safety Airbags Warning VAN In the event that the SRS malfunction indica tor lamp comes on during driving or does not come on at all the SRS may not be op erational For your safety we strongly rec ommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center immediately to have the system checked otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an acci dent which could result
307. tton gt Press unlock button on the SmartKey All turn signal lamps flash once The locking knobs in the doors move up gt Getin the vehicle and insert the Smart Key in the starter switch For more information see Locking and unlocking gt page 82 Starter switch positions S p P82 00 2187 31 Starter switch 0 For removing SmartKey The steering is locked when the Smart Key is removed from the starter switch If necessary move steering wheel slightly to allow the locking mechanism to engage 1 Power supply to some electrical con sumers such as seat adjustment 2 Ignition power supply for all electrical consumers and driving position 3 Starting position Warning A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch and lock the vehicle Do not leave children unattend ed in the vehicle or with access to an un locked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury e Vehicles with automatic transmission The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position P Getting started Unlocking If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the starter switch the battery may not be sufficiently charged e Check the battery and charge it if necessary gt page 307 e Geta jump start gt page 310 To prevent accelerated battery dis charge and a possible d
308. ument cluster Coolant temperature display Warning A e Driving when your engine is badly over heated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine com partment to catch fire You could be se riously burned e Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the engine hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it Turn off the engine get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until it has cooled down Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 gt Call up the trip odometer and main odometer by pressing button or on the multifunction steering wheel gt page 110 gt Press button EAN or Keg until the coolant temperature display appears i Excessive coolant temperature trigger a warning in the multifunction display During severe operating conditions e g stop and go city traffic the coolant tem perature may rise close to 248 F 120 C The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248 F 120 C Doing so may cause serious en gine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Trip odometer gt Make sure you are viewing the trip odometer and main odometer gt page 109 in the multifunction dis play gt Ifitis not displayed press button or on the multifunction steering wheel gt page 110 repeatedly until the trip odometer a
309. unction display gt Describe the nature of the need for as sistance The Mercedes Benz Roadside assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Mercedes Benz technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest Mercedes Benz Center For services such as labor and or towing charges may ap ply Refer to the Roadside Assistance man ual for more information These programs are only available in the USA e Sign and Drive services Services such as jump start a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable e Remote Vehicle Diagnostics This func tion permits the Mercedes Benz Road side Assistance dispatcher to download malfunction codes and actu al vehicle data The indicator lamp in the Roadside As sistance button remains illumi nated in red for approx ten seconds during the system self check after turn ing the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 together with the SOS button and the Information button Ey See system self check gt page 207 when the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than ap proximately ten seconds If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance button is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center es tablished then the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside Assis tance call e g the relevant cellular phone network is not available T
310. unctioning HIGH BEAM R The right high beam lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible CHECK LIGHT malfunctioning LIGHT SENSOR The lamp sensor is malfunctioning The gt Inthe control system set lamp VISIT WORKSHOP headlamps switch on automatically operation to manual gt page 125 gt Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch p gt Visit an authorized Mercedes Benz Center as soon as possible LICENSE PLATE LIGHT L The left license plate lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible CHECK LIGHT malfunctioning LICENSE PLATE LIGHT R The right license plate lamp is gt Replace the bulb as soon as possible CHECK LIGHT malfunctioning Display symbol Display message LIGHTS OW BEAM HECK LIGH p 1ap zsh ed 2s se ie a ie m E nal T m E r G TE O2 e te I BACK UP LIGHT MARKER LIGHT CHEC BACK UP LIGHT TAIL LIGHT L CHEC BACK UP LIGHT TURN OFF LIGHTS ao PE ON FR Possible cause This display appears if the driver s door is opened with the engine shut off and no SmartKey in the starter switch The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning The right low beam lamp is malfunctioning The left backup lamp is malfunctioning The right backup lamp is malfunctioning The left side marker parking lamps are malfunctioning A backup bulb is being used The right side marker parking lamps are malfunctioning A backup bulb
311. up and possible tire failure ABS Antilock Brake System Prevents the wheels from locking up during braking so that the vehicle can continue to be steered Alignment bolt Metal pin with thread The centering pin is an aid used when changing a tire to align the wheel with the wheel hub BabySmart airbag deactivation system This system detects if a special system compatible child restraint seat is in stalled on the front passenger seat The system will automatically deactivate the passenger front airbag when sucha seat is properly installed indicator lamp PASS AIRBAG OFF in the center console comes on See your autho rized Mercedes Benz Center for avail ability BabySmart compatible child seats Special restraint system for children The sensor system for the passenger seat prevents deployment of the pas senger front airbag if a BabySmart compatible child seat is installed BAS Brake Assist System System for potentially reducing braking distances in emergency braking situa tions The system is activated when it senses an emergency based on how fast the brake is applied Bi Xenon headlamps Headlamps which use an electric arc as the light source and produce a more in tense light than filament headlamps Bi Xenon headlamps produce low beam and high beam Technical terms CAC Customer Assistance Center Mercedes Benz customer service cen ter which can help you with any ques tions about
312. ur while driv ing the number of malfunctions will reap pear in the display when the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position O or removed from the starter switch e The message memory will be cleared when you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 1 or 2 You Number of malfunctions will then only see high priority gt Press button Sa or PAN on multifunction display If malfunctions have occurred you will see the number of malfunctions in the display The stored messages will now be dis played in order For malfunction and warning messages see Messages in the display gt page 264 Settings menu In the SETTINGS menu there are two func tions e The function RESET TO FACTORY SET TINGS with which you can reset all the settings to the original factory settings e A collection of submenus with which you can make individual settings for your vehicle gt Press button or repeatedly until the SETTINGS menu is seen in the display SETTINGS ce TO RESET k BUTTON FOR 3 SEC 72 F Resetting all settings You can reset all the functions of all sub menus to the factory settings gt Press the reset button in the instru ment cluster gt page 22 for approxi mately three seconds In the display you will see the request to press the reset button again to con firm RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS TO CONFIRM PRESS R BUTTON Press the reset button again
313. ures The higher the temperature an oil can tolerate without becoming thin or the lower the temperature it can tol erate without becoming viscous the better the viscosity ESP Electronic Stability Program Improves vehicle handling and direc tional stability ETD Emergency Tensioning Device Device which deploys in certain frontal and rear collisions exceeding the sys tem s threshold to tighten the seat belts gt SRS FSS Flexible Service System Service indicator in the multifunction display that informs the driver when the next vehicle maintenance service is due Gear range Number of gears which are available to the automatic transmission for shifting The automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to specific operating conditions using the gear selector le ver GPS Global Positioning System Satellite based system for relaying geographic location information to and from vehicles equipped with special re ceivers Employs CD digital maps for navigation Instrument cluster The displays and indicator warning lamps in the driver s field of vision in cluding the tachometer speedometer and fuel gauge Kickdown Depressing the accelerator past the point of resistance shifts the transmis sion down to the lowest possible gear This very quickly accelerates the vehi cle and should not be used for normal acceleration needs Lock button Button on the door which indicates whether the door is locked
314. utton EEI longer than one second gt A call will be placed to the saved num ber e g 911 Please be aware that the 911 emergen cy call system is a public service Using it without due cause is a criminal of fense You can make an emergency call to an emergency rescue station with a mobile communications network The emergency call will be placed as long as the corresponding mobile communica tions network is available To do this switch the telephone on if this has not al ready been done The call will also be placed even if the un lock code is not entered Emergency calls may not be possible with all telephone networks or if certain net work services and or telephone functions are active Check with your local network operation company It may take some time to set up an emergency call To use this function you must ensure that the number stored in memory location 1 is the number to be dialed in case of emer gency If an emergency call cannot be connected the message SYSTM BUSY appears Accepting an incoming call Accepting an incoming call in telephone mode With an incoming call a ringing tone can be heard and the caller s telephone num ber or the name under which this tele phone number has been saved in the telephone book appears on the display If the caller s number is not transmitted CALL will appear in the display gt Press the SND key to accept call Accepting an incoming call in
315. uttons 110 Consumption 237 Sliding pop up roof in an Dipstick 237 emergency 292 N Navigation system Operating 117 Fillerneck 240 Viscosity 342 Sliding pop up roof with SmartKey 192 ag at Oil level Trunk 85 pp i COMAND operating ins Checking 235 Windows 186 187 i Pie ee One touch gearshifting 140 Windows with SmartKey 188 Night security illumination 100 P Setting 127 Canceling gear range limit 140 Operating Downshifting 140 Audio system 159 o Upshifting 140 Cassette player 116 Occupant safety 56 Opening CD player 116 Airbags 57 Ashtray 203 COMAND see separate operating in Children and airbags 58 Doors from the inside 85 structions Children in the vehicle 65 Fuel filler flap 233 Navigation system 117 Fastening the seat belt 41 Fuel filler flap manually 291 Radio 115 Infant and child restraint systems 65 Glove box 200 Radio transmitters 230 LATCH child seat mounts 70 Hood 236 Telephone 134 159 179 Seat belts 41 60 power window with SmartKey 188 Operating safety Roller sunblind for the sliding pop up roof 189 Odometer main 23 Audio system 159 Operator s Manual 10 Ornamental moldings 253 Outside temperature indicator 107 Overdue service 249 Overhead control panel 27 Overspeed range 343 P Paintwork 252 Panic alarm 72 Panic button on SmartKey 72 Panorama sliding pop up roof 189 Parcel net In front passenger footwell 203 Parking 52 225 Parking brake 46 52 Engaging 52 Message in display 269 Releasing 46
316. vated af ter approximately 6 to 17 minutes of oper ation depending on the outside temperature Activating gt Press button Rg gt page 151 The indicator lamp on the button comes on Deactivating gt Press button EA gt page 151 again The indicator lamp on the button goes out Warning A Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driv ing Visibility could otherwise be impaired endangering you and others Controls in detail Good visibility If the rear window defroster switches off too soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing this means that too many electrical consumers are operat ing simultaneously and there is insuffi cient voltage in the battery The system responds automatically by deactivating the rear window defroster As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage the rear window defroster au tomatically turns itself back on Controls in detail Climate control YV Climate control Item Climate control panel Left center air vent adjustable Right center air vent adjustable Thumbwheel for air volume control for left center air vent Thumbwheel for air volume control for right center air vent Air volume control for side air vent Side air vent adjustable OOI OOO Side defroster vent fixed i For draft free ventilation move the slid ers for the center air vents and to the middle position Climate
317. vehicle is in motion Infant and child restraint seats and infor mation on choosing an appropriate re straint system can be obtained from any Mercedes Benz Center Safety and Security Occupant safety Infant and child restraint systems Use only a BabySmart compatible child restraint for the front passenger seat in this vehicle We recommend all infants and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion All lap shoulder belts except the driver s seat belt have special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child restraints To fasten a child restraint follow child re straint instructions for mounting Then pull the shoulder belt out completely and let it retract During the seat belt retraction a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is acti vated The belt is now locked Push down on child restraint to take up any slack To deactivate release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely The seat belt can again be used in the usual man ner 1 BabySmartTM is a Automotive Corp trademark of Siemens Safety and Security Occupant safety i For information on child seats with mounting fittings for tether anchorag es see Installation of infant and child restraint systems gt page 69 For information on LATCH type child seat anchors see Child seat anchors LATCH type gt page 70 War
318. ways be kept as low as possible since it in fluences the handling characteristics of the vehicle Controls in detail Loading A Always fasten items being carried as secure ly as possible Warning In an accident during hard braking or sud den maneuvers loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle and can cause in jury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle To help avoid personal injury during a colli sion or sudden maneuver exercise care when transporting cargo Put luggage or car go in the trunk if possible Do not pile lug gage or cargo higher than the seat backs Do not place anything on the rear window shelf Never drive vehicle with trunk lid open Deadly carbon monoxide CO gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in uncon sciousness and death Controls in detail Useful features YV Useful features Interior storage spaces Glove box i Prior to closing the glove box close the compartment for glasses first Warning VAN To help avoid personal injury during a colli sion or sudden maneuver exercise care when stowing objects in the vehicle Put lug gage or cargo in the trunk if possible Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat backs Do not place anything on the luggage Locking the glove box gt Insert mechanical key into the glove box lock and turn it to position Unlocking the glove box gt Turn mechanical ke
319. which have been specifically developed for your vehicle and tested and approved by Mercedes Benz Other tires and rims can have detrimental effects such as e poor handling characteristics e increased noise e increased fuel consumption Moreover tires and rims not approved by Mercedes Benz may under load ex hibit dimensional variations and differ ent tire deformation characteristics that could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts This may result in damage to the tires or the vehicle Technical data Rims and Tires Further information on tires and rims is available at any authorized Mercedes Benz Center A tire inflation pressure table is located on the fuel filler flap of the vehicle The tire pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires Follow tire man ufacturer s maintenance recommenda tion included with vehicle Technical data Rims and Tires Same size tires Model C 230 Kompressor standard in U S A C 230 Kompressor standard in Canada optional in Canada Canada only Evolution Package c 320 Evolution Package Rims light alloy 7 3 x17 7 x 16 H2 Wheel offset 1 46 in 37 mm 1 46 in 37 mm Summer tires radial ply tires 225 45 R17 91W All season tires radial ply tires 205 55 R16 91 H Winter tires radial ply tires 225 45 R17 91 H M S 205 55R16 91 H M S 1 Must not be used with snow chains Spare wheel C 230 Kompress
320. witch to position 2 It goes out when the engine is running Warning A Never switch off the ESP when you see the ESP warning lamp flashing in the speedometer dial In this case proceed as follows e While driving off apply as little throttle as possible e While driving ease up on the accelera tor e Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed Safety and Security Driving safety systems Warning VAN The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The ca pabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or danger ous manner which could jeopardize the us er s safety or the safety of others Safety and Security Driving safety systems T Switching off the ESP The switch is located on the center con sole Because of the ESP s automatic opera tion the engine must be shut off Warning A SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 when The ESP should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circum stances described below Disabling of the s
321. working under the vehicle Spare wheel bolts P40 10 3165 31 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims Wheel bolt for light alloy spare wheel rim size 4 7B x15 H2 E Wheel bolts must be used when mounting spare wheel rim size 4 B x15 H2 gt page 326 The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for spare wheel rim size 4 1 3B x15 H2 can cause physical damage to the vehicle Practical hints Where will I find Warning A Make sure to use the original length wheel bolts when remounting the original wheel af ter it has been repaired For more information on model and spare wheel rim size see Technical data sec tion gt page 326 Practical hints Unlocking locking in an emergency Vv Unlocking locking in an emergency Unlocking the driver s door Unlocking the vehicle If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey open the driver s door using the mechanical key The passenger door cannot be unlocked manually a gt 17 Unlocking your vehicle with the me aa chanical key will trigger the anti theft Mechanical key locking tab alarm system To cancel the alarm do Mechanical key Unlocking ne oF Me following gt Move locking tab Q in direction of ar Locking e Press button or on the row and slide the mechanical key gt Unlock the door with the mechanical SmartKey out of the housing key To do so push the mechanical key e Inse
322. x upholstery Cleaning 256 Mechanical key 288 289 Memory function 95 343 Recalling positions from memory 96 Storing exterior rear view mirror parking positions 97 Storing key dependent settings 96 Menus 110 AUDIO 114 Control system 343 In control system 112 113 Malfunction memory 117 NAV 117 Settings menu 118 Standard display 114 Submenus 111 TEL 134 Trip computer 132 Microphone Hands free microphone 27 Miles kilometers in speedometer Setting 124 Mirrors Adjusting 39 Automatic antiglare for rear view mirror 146 Exterior rear view mirror 40 Exterior rear view mirror parking positions 132 Interior rear view mirror 39 Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position 97 MON 234 MON Motor Octane Number 343 Mph or km h in speedometer 124 Multifunction display 109 343 Displaying gear range 141 Selecting language 124 Standard display 113 Multifunction display messages ABS 268 BAS 265 Battery 269 Brake fluid 270 Brake pads 270 Check engine 260 Check gas cap 277 Coolant 272 Coolant level 271 Cruise control 274 Display 274 Doors 274 Engine 260 Engine oil 276 ESP 266 Fuel reserve tank 277 Hood 277 Key 277 Lamps 277 279 Parking brake 269 Steering column not properly locked 282 Steering gear oil level 282 Tele Aid 283 Telephone 283 Trunk lid 283 Washer fluid 283 Oil Side windows 187 Multifunction steering wheel 24 110 343 Adding 239 Sliding pop up roof 190 292 B
323. y the panorama sliding pop up roof has been opened with an abrupt movement a malfunction Switch on ignition Move the switch in direction 3 and wait until the roller sunblind are fully closed Hold the switch for approximately one second Move the switch in the direction and wait until the roller sunblind is ap proximately 4 in 10 cm opened Release the switch Move the switch in the direction and wait until the roller sunblind is fully closed Hold the switch for approximately one second The roller sunblind is synchronized Controls in detail Panorama sliding pop up roof gt Move the switch in direction and wait until the roller sunblind are fully opened Hold the switch for approximately one second gt Move the switch in the direction and wait until the panorama slid ing pop up roof is approximately 4 in 10 cm opened Release the switch gt Move the switch in the direction and wait until the panorama slid ing pop up roof is fully closed Hold the switch for approximately one second The panorama sliding pop up roof is syn chronized when the panorama slid ing pop up roof opens automatically Repeat synchronization if necessary Controls in detail Driving systems Y Driving systems The driving system of your vehicle is de scribed on the following pages e Cruise control with which the vehicle can maintain a preset speed For information on th
324. y always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors Be espe cially careful when small children are around Before closing doors make sure there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing gt After exiting the vehicle press the lock button on the SmartKey gt page 30 All turn signal lamps flash three times The locking knobs in the doors move down A When leaving the vehicle always remove the SmartKey from the starter switch and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unat tended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehi cle equipment may cause an accident and or serious personal injury Warning For more information see Locking and unlocking gt page 82 Safety and Security Occupant safety Panic alarm Driving safety systems Anti theft systems Safety and Security Occupant safety Y Occupant safety In this section you will learn the most im portant facts about the restraint systems of the vehicle The restraint systems are e Seat belts e Emergency tensioning device e Airbags e Child seats e Child seat recognition e Lower anchors and tethers for children LATCH As independent systems their protective effects work in conjunction with each oth er i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and re straint systems for infan
325. y Program i In winter operation the maximum ef fectiveness of the ABS ESP is only achieved with winter tires M S tires or snow chains as required A The following factors increase the risk of ac cidents Warning e Excessive speed especially in turns e Wet and slippery road surfaces e Following another vehicle too closely The ABS BAS ESP cannot reduce this risk Always adjust your driving style to the pre vailing road and weather conditions ABS A Do not pump the brake pedal Use firm steady brake pedal pressure instead Pump ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness Warning The Antilock Brake System ABS regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock during braking This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle The ABS is functional above a speed of ap proximately 5 mph 8 km h independent of road surface conditions On slippery road surfaces the ABS will re spond even with light brake pressure The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster gt page 22 comes on when you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 2 It goes out when the engine is running Safety and Security Driving safety systems Braking At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode gt Keep
326. y if the brake warning lamp stays on Don t add brake fluid before checking the brake system Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire You can be seriously burned brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks Practical hints What to do if Problem Possible cause Suggested solution ERA The yellow CHECK ENGINE There is a malfunction in gt Have the vehicle checked as soon as malfunction indicator lamp e The fuel management system possible by an authorized comes on while driving Mercedes Benz Center e The ignition system An on board diagnostic connector is used by the service station to link the vehicle to the shop diagnostics sys tem It allows the accurate identifica e The emission control system e Systems which affect emissions Such malfunctions may result in excessive tion of system malfunctions through emissions values and may switch the engine the readout of diagnostic trouble to its limp home emergency operation codes It is located in the front left mode area of the footwell next to the parking brake pedal The fuel cap is not closed tight gt Check the fuel cap Your gas tank is empty gt After refuelling start the engine three or four times in succession The limp home mode is canceled You do not need to have your
327. y in the glove box cover below the rear window a Glove box lock to position Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy Glove box lid release objects Opening the glove box Keep compartment lids closed This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown gt Pull lid release about and injuring vehicle occupants during A The glove box lid opens downward an accident Closing the glove box gt Push lid up to close Controls in detail Useful features Storage compartment infront of arm Cup holder Opening cup holder rest Warning A When not in use keep the cup holder closed Place only containers that fit into the cup holder to prevent spills Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents especially hot liquids could spill during vehicle maneu vers EE a gt Slide cover rearward Opening gt Push button Q gt Slide cover Q rearward The cup holder opens automatically The compartment contains a cigarette lighter gt page 204 acoin holder and a cup holder Closing gt Slide cover Q forward Controls in detail Useful features Closing cup holder Armrest storage spaces Opening telephone compartment gt Press button on left or right side and lift up armrest Closing telephone compartment gt Press armrest down until it engages into place Changing inclination of armrest gt Pull up on armrest gt Push
328. y way in jeopardy when in the vehicle e g smoke or fire in the vehicle ve hicle in a dangerous road location please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca tion The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle s approximate location if they re ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occu pants Controls in detail Useful features Roadside Assistance button The Roadside Assistance button is located below the center armrest cover gt Press and hold the button for longer than two seconds A call to a Mercedes Benz Roadside As sistance dispatcher will be initiated The button will flash while the call is in progress The message TELE DIAGNO SIS CONNECTING CALL will appear in the multifunction display When the connection is established the message TELE DIAGNOSIS CALL CON NECTED appears in the multifunction dis play The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification num ber model color and location subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established When a voice connection is established the audio system mutes and the message TELE AID ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE ap pears in the multif
329. you may select and dial a number from the phone book at any time gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the TEL menu in the display gt Press button EANN or Keg The control system reads the phone book which is stored in the telephone This may take up to 30 seconds In the display you will see the message PLEASE WAIT When the message PLEASE WAIT disap pears the phone book has been load ed gt Press button J or ed repeatedly until the desired name appears in the display The stored names are displayed in as cending or descending alphabetical or der 5 0 Ifyou press and hold EAN or R for longer than one second the system scrolls rapidly through the list of names until you release the button again Cancel the quick search mode by pressing EN gt Press button KA The system dials the selected phone number e If the connection is successful the name of the party you called and the duration of the call will appear in the display P54 32 2212 31 e f no connection is made the con trol system stores the dialed num ber in the redial memory Redialing The control system stores the most recent ly dialed phone numbers This eliminates the need to search through your entire phone book gt Press button or repeatedly until you see the TEL menu in the dis play gt Press button K In the display you see the first number in the redial memory gt Pr
330. your vehicle and provide assistance in the event of a break down CAN system Controller Area Network Data bus network serving to control ve hicle functions such as door locking or windshield wiping Cockpit All instruments switches buttons and indicator warning lamps in the passen ger compartment needed for vehicle operation and monitoring Technical terms Collapsible tire An especially compact spare tire that must be inflated with a provided air pump before using It should only be used to bring the vehicle to the nearest service station COMAND Cockpit Management and Data Sys tem Information and operating center for vehicle sound and communications systems including the radio and navi gation system as well as other optional equipment CD changer telephone etc Control system The control system is used to call up vehicle information and to change component settings Information and messages appear in the multifunction display The driver uses the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to navigate through the system and to ad just settings Cruise control Driving convenience system for auto matically maintaining the vehicle speed set by the driver Engine number The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the cylinder block to uniquely identify each engine pro duced Engine oil viscosity Measurement for the inner friction vis cosity of the oil at different tempera t
331. ystem will reduce vehicle stability in stan e the vehicle is being towed with the dard driving maneuvers front axle raised e the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer Active braking action through the ESP To improve the vehicle s traction turn off may otherwise seriously damage the the ESP in driving situations where it would ESP off rear axle brake system be advantageous to have drive wheels spin ESP on The ESP will only function properly if and thus cut into surfaces for better grip y aia such as gt Press upper half of the ESP switch you use wheels of the recommended os n until the ESP warning lam in the tire size e starting out on slippery surfaces and in eas speedometer comes on deep snow in conjunction with snow For more information see Practical hints chains The ESP is deactivated gt page 261 e sand or gravel If one or more drive wheels are spinning the ESP warning lamp in the speed ometer dial flashes regardless of the speed Traction control brakes a spinning wheel even when the ESP is deactivated The ESP always operates when you are braking even when it has been deactivat ed Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period with the ESP switched off This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes Benz Limited Warranty Safety and Security Driving safety systems A Warning Turn on the E
332. ystems checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center gt page 260 Close the doors Display symbol Display message USA only ADD 1 0 Qt ENGINE OIL WHEN NEXT REFUELING Canada only ADD 1 0 LITER ENG OIL WHEN NEXT REFUELING Possible cause The engine oil level is too low There is no oil in the engine There is a danger of engine damage You have added too much engine oil There is a risk of damaging the engine or the catalytic converter Practical hints What to do if Possible solution gt Addengine oil gt page 239 and check the engine oil level gt page 238 gt Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as soon as possible gt Turn off the engine gt Add engine oil gt Have excess oil siphoned or drained off Observe all legal requirements with respect to its disposal 275 Practical hints What to do if Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution It may be that there is water inthe engine Have the engine oil checked oil The engine oil has dropped to a critical Check the engine oil level level gt page 238 and add oil as required gt If you must add engine oil frequently have the engine checked for possible leaks The measuring system is malfunctioning Have the measuring system checked by an authorized Mercedes Benz Center When the mes

Mercedes-Benz 2003 ML 500 Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents